Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–1

Page 1A7A–1

Section 1A7A Seat Assemblies

(Build No L253068 Onwards)

ATTENTION

Before performing any Service Operation or other procedure described in this Section, refer to Section 00

Warnings, Cautions and Notes for correct workshop practices with regard to safety and/or property damage.

1 General Information .............................................................................................................................14

1.1 Front Seat General Description.......................................................................................................................... 14

Seat Covers.......................................................................................................................................................... 15

Electric Seat Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 15

Raise/Lower Movement.................................................................................................................................... 15

Fore/Aft Movement........................................................................................................................................... 15

Recline Movement............................................................................................................................................ 16

Four-way and Six-way Movement Control........................................................................................................ 16

Eight-way Movement Control ........................................................................................................................... 16

Memory Seat Position System ......................................................................................................................... 17

Priority Keys (Level 5 Vehicles Only) ............................................................................................................... 17

Memory Buttons............................................................................................................................................... 18

Using the Exterior Mirrors................................................................................................................................. 18

Active Head Restraints........................................................................................................................................ 19

1.2 Rear Seat General Description ........................................................................................................................... 20

Seat Covers.......................................................................................................................................................... 20

Surebond.......................................................................................................................................................... 20

Hook and loop.................................................................................................................................................. 20

Conventional pull-down.................................................................................................................................... 20

2 Diagnostics – Front Seat, Level 1.......................................................................................................21

2.1 Prerequisites........................................................................................................................................................ 21

Safety Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 21

Equipment ............................................................................................................................................................ 21

Testing Procedures ............................................................................................................................................. 21

2.2 Mechanical Diagnosis ......................................................................................................................................... 22

Lumbar Support Inoperative............................................................................................................................... 22

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 22

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 22

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 22

Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative....................................................................... 23

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 23

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 23

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 23

Four-way Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or is Not Smooth............................................... 23

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 23

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 23

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 23

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–2

Page 1A7A–2

2.3 Electrical Diagnosis – Four-way/Six-way Seat.................................................................................................. 24

Wiring Diagram – Four-way/Six-way Seat.......................................................................................................... 25

Connector Chart – Four-way/Six-way Seat........................................................................................................ 26

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate........................................................................................ 27

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 27

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 27

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 27

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 28

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate...................................................................29

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 29

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 29

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 29

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 30

Front/Rear of the Driver's Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower......................................................................... 31

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 31

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 31

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 31

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 32

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or not Smooth...................................................... 33

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 33

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 33

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 33

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 34

None of the Passenger's Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate...........................................................35

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 35

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 35

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 35

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 36

Front/Rear of the Passenger's Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower.................................................................37

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 37

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 37

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 37

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 38

2.4 Four-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test............................................................................................................. 39

Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 39

2.5 Six-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test ............................................................................................................... 40

Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 40

3 Diagnostics – Front Seat, Level 2, 3, 4 and 5 ....................................................................................41

3.1 Prerequisites........................................................................................................................................................ 41

Safety Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 41

Equipment ............................................................................................................................................................ 41

Testing Procedures ............................................................................................................................................. 41

3.2 Mechanical Diagnosis ......................................................................................................................................... 42

Lumbar Support Inoperative............................................................................................................................... 42

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 42

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 42

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 42

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–3

Page 1A7A–3

3.3 Electrical Diagnosis – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD.............................................................................. 43

Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD..................................................................................... 44

Connector Chart – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD ................................................................................... 45

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate........................................................................................ 46

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 46

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 46

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 46

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 47

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate...................................................................48

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 48

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 48

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 48

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 49

Front/Rear of the Driver’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower......................................................................... 50

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 50

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 50

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 50

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 51

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth...................................................... 52

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 52

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 52

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 52

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 53

Driver’s Seat-back Recline Forw ard and/or Aft Function is Inoperative......................................................... 54

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 54

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 54

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 54

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 55

None of the Passenger’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate........................................................... 56

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 56

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 56

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 56

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 57

Front/Rear of the Passenger’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower................................................................. 58

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 58

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 58

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 58

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 59

Passenger’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth.............................................. 60

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 60

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 60

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 60

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 61

Passenger’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative................................................. 62

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 62

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 62

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 62

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 63

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–4

Page 1A7A–4

3.4 Electrical Diagnosis – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD.............................................................................. 64

Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD...................................................................................... 65

Connector Chart – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD.................................................................................... 66

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate........................................................................................ 67

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 67

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 67

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 67

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 68

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate...................................................................69

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 69

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 69

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 69

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 70

Front/Rear of the Driver’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower......................................................................... 71

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 71

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 71

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 71

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 72

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth...................................................... 73

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 73

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 73

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 73

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 74

Driver’s Seat-back Recline Forw ard and/or Aft Function is Inoperative......................................................... 75

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 75

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 75

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 75

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 76

None of the Passenger’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate........................................................... 77

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 77

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 77

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 77

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 78

Front/Rear of the Passenger’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower................................................................. 79

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 79

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 79

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 79

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 80

Passenger’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth.............................................. 81

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 81

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 81

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 81

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 82

Passenger’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative................................................. 83

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 83

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................... 83

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................... 83

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................... 84

3.5 Eight-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test............................................................................................................ 85

Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 85

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–5

Page 1A7A–5

4 Diagnostics – Front Seat, Memory and Rear-view Mirror, Level 5..................................................86

4.1 Prerequisites........................................................................................................................................................ 86

Safety Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 86

Equipment ............................................................................................................................................................ 86

Testing Procedures ............................................................................................................................................. 86

4.2 System Self Diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................ 87

Current DTCs........................................................................................................................................................ 87

History DTCs........................................................................................................................................................ 87

Clearing DTCs...................................................................................................................................................... 87

4.3 Tech 2 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................................. 88

Test Modes........................................................................................................................................................... 88

Mode F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes................................................................................................................ 88

Mode F1: Diagnostic Data Display................................................................................................................... 88

Mode F2: Snapshot.......................................................................................................................................... 88

Mode F3: Miscellaneous Tests......................................................................................................................... 88

Mode F4: Additional Functions......................................................................................................................... 88

4.4 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays for Diagnosis................................................................................................ 89

System Select Menu............................................................................................................................................ 89

Body Application Menu....................................................................................................................................... 89

System Identification........................................................................................................................................... 89

Application Menu................................................................................................................................................. 89

F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes............................................................................................................................ 90

F0: Read DTC Information ............................................................................................................................... 90

F1: Clear DTC Information ............................................................................................................................... 90

Diagnostic Trouble Codes................................................................................................................................... 90

F1: Diagnostic Data Display................................................................................................................................ 91

F0: Inputs and Outputs..................................................................................................................................... 91

F1: Memory...................................................................................................................................................... 94

F2: System Identification.................................................................................................................................. 95

F2: Snapshot........................................................................................................................................................ 96

F3: Miscellaneous Tests...................................................................................................................................... 96

F0: Chime......................................................................................................................................................... 96

F1: LED............................................................................................................................................................ 96

F2: Right Exterior Mirror................................................................................................................................... 96

F3: Left Exterior Mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 96

F4: Front Vertical Motor.................................................................................................................................... 96

F5: Rear Vertical Mirror.................................................................................................................................... 96

F6: Horizontal Motor......................................................................................................................................... 96

F7: Recline Motor............................................................................................................................................. 96

F4: Additional Functions..................................................................................................................................... 97

F0: Module Reset............................................................................................................................................. 97

4.5 Preliminary System Diagnosis............................................................................................................................ 98

4.6 Diagnostic Tables................................................................................................................................................ 99

Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................... 99

4.7 Mechanical Diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 100

Lumbar Support Inoperative............................................................................................................................. 100

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 100

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 100

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 100

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–6

Page 1A7A–6

4.8 Electrical Diagnosis – Memory Seat ................................................................................................................. 101

Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD .............................................................................................................. 101

Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD............................................................................................................... 103

Connector Chart – Memory Seat ...................................................................................................................... 105

Initial Check........................................................................................................................................................ 106

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 106

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 106

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 107

No Serial Data Communications to the Seat Memory Module....................................................................... 111

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 111

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 111

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 111

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 112

Seat Adjustment Switch Inoperative – RHD .................................................................................................... 113

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 113

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 113

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 113

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 114

Seat Adjustment Switch Inoperative – LHD..................................................................................................... 115

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 115

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 115

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 115

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 116

Seat Front Lift Motor Inoperative – RHD.......................................................................................................... 117

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 117

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 117

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 117

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 117

Seat Front Lift Motor Inoperative – LHD .......................................................................................................... 118

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 118

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 118

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 118

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 118

Seat Rear Lift Motor Inoperative....................................................................................................................... 119

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 119

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 119

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 119

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 119

Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Inoperative..................................................................................................... 120

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 120

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 120

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 120

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 120

Seat-back Recline Motor Inoperative ............................................................................................................... 121

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 121

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 121

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 121

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 122

Memory Position Switch Inoperati ve – RHD.................................................................................................... 123

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 123

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 123

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 123

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 123

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–7

Page 1A7A–7

Memory Position Switch Inoperative – LHD.................................................................................................... 124

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 124

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 124

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 124

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 124

Seat Front Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check............................................................................................... 125

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 125

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 125

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 125

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 125

Seat Rear Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check................................................................................................ 126

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 126

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 126

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 126

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 126

Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check.............................................................................. 127

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 127

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 127

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 127

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 127

Seat-back Recline Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check........................................................................................ 128

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 128

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 128

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 128

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 128

Priority Key Feature Inoperative....................................................................................................................... 129

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 129

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 129

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 129

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 129

DTC 1 – Front Vertical Up Switch Stuck – RHD............................................................................................... 130

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 130

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 130

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 130

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 130

DTC 1 – Front Vertical Up Switch Stuck – LHD............................................................................................... 131

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 131

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 131

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 131

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 131

DTC 2 – Front Vertical Down Switch Stuck – RHD.......................................................................................... 132

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 132

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 132

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 132

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 132

DTC 2 – Front Vertical Down Switch Stuck – LHD.......................................................................................... 133

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 133

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 133

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 133

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 133

DTC 3 – Rear Vertical Up Switch Stuck – RHD................................................................................................ 134

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 134

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 134

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 134

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 134

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–8

Page 1A7A–8

DTC 3 – Rear Vertical Up Switch Stuck – LHD ................................................................................................ 135

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 135

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 135

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 135

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 135

DTC 4 – Rear Vertical Down Switch Stuck – RHD........................................................................................... 136

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 136

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 136

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 136

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 136

DTC 4 – Rear Vertical Down Switch Stuck – LHD ........................................................................................... 137

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 137

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 137

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 137

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 137

DTC 5 – Horizontal Forward Switch Stuck....................................................................................................... 138

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 138

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 138

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 138

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 138

DTC 6 – Horizontal Back Switch Stuck ............................................................................................................ 139

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 139

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 139

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 139

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 139

DTC 7 – Recline Up Switch Stuck..................................................................................................................... 140

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 140

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 140

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 140

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 140

DTC 8 – Recline Down Switch Stuck................................................................................................................ 141

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 141

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 141

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 141

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 141

DTC 9 – Memory Button 1 Stuck....................................................................................................................... 142

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 142

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 142

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 142

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 142

DTC 10 – Memory Button 2 Stuck..................................................................................................................... 143

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 143

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 143

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 143

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 143

DTC 11 – Memory Button 3 Stuck..................................................................................................................... 144

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 144

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 144

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 144

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 144

DTC 12 – Mirror DIP Button Stuck.................................................................................................................... 145

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 145

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 145

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 145

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 145

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–9

Page 1A7A–9

DTC 13 – No Serial Data .................................................................................................................................... 146

DTC 14 – No Exterior Mirror Communications................................................................................................ 146

DTC 20 – Front Vertical Position Sensor Fault................................................................................................ 146

DTC 21 – Rear Vertical Position Sensor Fault................................................................................................. 146

DTC 22 – Horizontal Position Sensor Fault ..................................................................................................... 146

DTC 23 – Recline Position Sensor Fault.......................................................................................................... 146

DTC 24 – System Voltage Out of Range .......................................................................................................... 146

4.9 Memory Position Switch Test........................................................................................................................... 147

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 147

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 147

Test ..................................................................................................................................................................... 147

4.10 Electrical Diagnosis – Rear-view Mirrors......................................................................................................... 149

Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD ...................................................................................................... 149

Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD....................................................................................................... 150

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors .............................................................................................................. 151

Initial Check........................................................................................................................................................ 152

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 152

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 152

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 153

Mirror Dip Function Check................................................................................................................................ 155

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 155

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 155

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 155

Mirror Heating Function Check......................................................................................................................... 156

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 156

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 156

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 156

No Serial Data from Exterior Rear-view Mirrors.............................................................................................. 157

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 157

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 157

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 157

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 158

No Serial Data – Right-hand Exterior Rear-view Mirror.................................................................................. 159

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 159

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 159

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 159

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 159

No Serial Data – Left-hand Exterior Rear-view Mirror..................................................................................... 160

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 160

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 160

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 160

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 160

Mirror Control Switch Inoperative.................................................................................................................... 161

Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 161

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 161

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 161

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 162

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–10

Page 1A7A–10

5 Service Operations – Front Seat.......................................................................................................163

5.1 Usage Chart........................................................................................................................................................ 163

How To Use This Chart...................................................................................................................................... 163

Domestic ........................................................................................................................................................ 163

Gulf States ..................................................................................................................................................... 164

Front Seat Type 1............................................................................................................................................... 165

Front Seat Type 2............................................................................................................................................... 167

Front Seat Type 3............................................................................................................................................... 169

Front Seat Type 4............................................................................................................................................... 171

Front Seat Type 5............................................................................................................................................... 173

Front Seat Type 6............................................................................................................................................... 175

Front Seat Type 7............................................................................................................................................... 177

Front Seat Type 8............................................................................................................................................... 179

Front Seat Type 9............................................................................................................................................... 181

Front Seat Type 10............................................................................................................................................. 183

Front Seat Type 11............................................................................................................................................. 185

Front Seat Type 12............................................................................................................................................. 187

Front Seat Type 13............................................................................................................................................. 189

Front Seat Type 14............................................................................................................................................. 191

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14 Head Restraint Assembly ................................................................................ 193

5.2 Fire Extinguisher Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 194

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 194

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 194

5.3 Front Seat Assembly......................................................................................................................................... 195

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 195

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 197

Seat Memory Calibration, Front Seat Type 3 and 13....................................................................................... 198

5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly........................................................................................................... 200

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 200

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 201

Front Seat Adjustment Switch........................................................................................................................ 201

Memory Position Switch Assembly................................................................................................................. 202

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 202

5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover.............................................................................................................................. 203

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 203

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 203

5.6 Front Seat-back Rear Cover Assembly............................................................................................................ 204

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 204

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 205

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 205

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 206

5.7 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly............................................................................................................... 207

Front Seat Type 1, 2 & 5 to 12........................................................................................................................... 207

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 207

Disassemble................................................................................................................................................... 207

Reassemble ................................................................................................................................................... 207

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 207

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14 ............................................................................................................................ 208

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 208

Disassemble................................................................................................................................................... 209

Reassemble ................................................................................................................................................... 212

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 212

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–11

Page 1A7A–11

5.8 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeve..................................................................................................................... 213

Front Seat Type 1, 2 & 5 to 12........................................................................................................................... 213

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 213

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 213

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14 ............................................................................................................................ 214

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 214

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 215

5.9 Lumbar Support Knob Assembly..................................................................................................................... 216

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 216

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 216

5.10 Front Seat-back Pad and Cover Assembly...................................................................................................... 217

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 217

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 218

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 219

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 219

5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly.................................................................................................................... 220

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 220

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 221

Side Impact Airbag Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 221

Front Seat Dummy Block Insert Assembly..................................................................................................... 222

Lumbar Support Assembly............................................................................................................................. 222

Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly......................................................................................................... 224

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 225

5.12 Seat Cable Tray and Memory Module .............................................................................................................. 226

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 226

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 227

5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly.................................................................................................................. 228

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 228

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 228

5.14 Front Seat Cushion Pad and Cover Assembly................................................................................................ 229

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 229

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 230

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 231

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 231

5.15 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly.............................................................................................................. 232

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 232

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 232

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 232

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 232

5.16 Front Seat Lift Motor Assemblies..................................................................................................................... 233

5.17 Front Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Assembly............................................................................................. 234

5.18 Front Seat-back Recline Motor Assembly ....................................................................................................... 235

5.19 Drive Motor Hall-effect Sensors........................................................................................................................ 236

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–12

Page 1A7A–12

6 Service Operations – Rear Seat........................................................................................................237

6.1 Usage Chart........................................................................................................................................................ 237

How To Use This Chart...................................................................................................................................... 237

Domestic ........................................................................................................................................................ 237

Gulf States ..................................................................................................................................................... 238

Rear Seat Type 1................................................................................................................................................ 239

Rear Seat Type 2................................................................................................................................................ 241

Rear Seat Type 3................................................................................................................................................ 243

Rear Seat Type 4................................................................................................................................................ 245

Rear Seat Type 5................................................................................................................................................ 247

Rear Seat Type 6................................................................................................................................................ 248

Rear Seat Type 7................................................................................................................................................ 250

Rear Seat Type 8................................................................................................................................................ 252

Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly without Compartment ................................................ 254

Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly with Compartment...................................................... 255

6.2 Rear Seat Cushion Assembly........................................................................................................................... 256

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 256

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 256

Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle............................................................................................................... 256

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.............................................................................................................................. 257

Cushion Cover Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 262

Rear Seat Type 1 and 6................................................................................................................................. 262

Rear Seat Type 2 and 7................................................................................................................................. 267

Rear Seat Type 3........................................................................................................................................... 272

Rear Seat Type 4........................................................................................................................................... 279

Rear Seat Type 5........................................................................................................................................... 284

Rear Seat Type 8........................................................................................................................................... 284

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 287

6.3 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Assembly Right-hand and Left-hand Side.................................................. 288

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 288

Except Rear Seat Type 8 Head Restraint ...................................................................................................... 289

Rear Seat Type 8 Head Restraint .................................................................................................................. 290

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 290

6.4 Rear Seat-back Assembly................................................................................................................................. 291

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 291

Head Restraint Sleeve....................................................................................................................................... 292

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 292

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 292

Rear Seat-back Cover........................................................................................................................................ 293

Rear Seat Type 1 and 6................................................................................................................................. 293

Rear Seat Type 2 and 7................................................................................................................................. 300

Rear Seat Type 3 and 4................................................................................................................................. 307

Rear Seat Type 5........................................................................................................................................... 313

Rear Seat Type 8........................................................................................................................................... 314

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 320

6.5 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Assembly........................................................................................... 321

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 321

Disassemble................................................................................................................................................... 322

Reassemble ................................................................................................................................................... 323

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 323

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–13

Page 1A7A–13

6.6 Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Assembly...................................................................................................... 324

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 324

Disassemble Rear Seat Type 1 – 4................................................................................................................... 324

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Hinge........................................................................................................... 324

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid and Cover.............................................................................................. 325

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Deposit Box, Cover and Cup Holder ........................................................... 326

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 329

Disassemble Rear Seat Type 5 – 8................................................................................................................... 329

Reassemble........................................................................................................................................................ 330

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 330

6.7 Rear Seat-back Centre Assembly..................................................................................................................... 331

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 331

Disassemble....................................................................................................................................................... 331

Pad Assembly, Cover and Head Restraint Sleeves ....................................................................................... 331

Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button......................................................................................................... 333

Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Actuator............................................................................................................ 334

Rear Seat-back Centre Hinge ........................................................................................................................ 334

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 334

6.8 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker................................................................................................................. 335

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 335

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 335

7 Torque Wrench Specifications..........................................................................................................336

Front Seat........................................................................................................................................................... 336

Rear Seat ............................................................................................................................................................ 336

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–14

Page 1A7A–14

1 General Information

This Section describes the service and dia gnostic procedures for the seat assemblies.

For Diagnosis the section is di vided as follows:

• front seat, Level,

• front seat, Level 2, 3, 4 and 5, and

• front seat, Memory and Rear-view Mirror, Level 5.

For Service Operations the section is divided as follows:

• front seat assemblies, and

• rear seat assemblies.

1.1 Front Seat General Description

For reasons of personal safety, the vehicle

must only be driven after the seat has been

adjusted to the correct driving position. Do

not adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle

is moving as the seat could move away from

the driving position, causing loss of control.

Accessory and after mar ket seat covers MUST

NOT be fitted to any vehicle with side impact

airbags unless app roved by the man ufacturer.

Non-approved seat covers may inhibit the

operation of the side airbag, reducing the

protection otherwise provided to the

occupants during a side-impact collision.

Depending on vehicl e Model Level, the front seats fitted may feature:

• four, six or eight-way electric movement functions,

• side impact airbag assembl ies,

• cloth or leather trim,

• active head restraints,

• rear seat entertainment screens in the back of the head restraints for Level 5 vehicles, and

• a driver's seat memory position system that integrates with other vehicle functions.

To identify the front seat type fitted, refer to 5.1 Usage Chart.

The front seatbelt buckle and pretens ioner assemblies are attached to the front seats. For service operat ions

refer to Section 12M, Occupant Protection System.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–15

Page 1A7A–15

Seat Covers

Two seat cover construction methods are used for the front seat assemblies. Surebond t ype cloth covers are not

serviced separately as they ar e glued to the seat pad. Hook and Lo op type covers are fully serviceable as they are

attached within the grooves of the seat pad with a Velcro type material.

Electric Seat Operation

Depending on Mode l Level of the vehicle, the following front seat electric movement functions are available:

• four-way – seat cushion front raise/lo wer and rear raise/lower,

• six-way – as four-way plus seat fore/aft, and

• eight-way – as six-way plus seat-back recline.

Referring to Figure 1A7A – 1, four electric motor and gearbox assemblies provide the movement of the front seat, one

each, where fitted, for:

• front raise/lower movement (1),

• rear raise/lower movement (2),

• seat fore/aft movement (3),

• seat-back recline (4).

Figure 1A7A – 1

Each function is independentl y controlled. Alternatively, if desired the front and rear raise/lower movement can be

performed together to raise or lower the complete seat.

Raise/Lower Movement

Two lift motor and gearbox assembli es (1 & 2, refer to Figure 1A7A – 1) are attached to the inboard side of the track and

height adjust assembly: one for front and the other for rear raise/lo wer movement. When a lift motor is operating, it drives

the gearbox which draws in or extends a mating worm shaft. This in turn operates on an arm and cross-shaft.

The cross-shaft is connected to another arm on the opposite side of the track and height adjust assembly and allows the

raising or lowering of that portion (front or rear) of the seat.

Fore/Aft Movement

To provide seat fore/aft movement, the motor and gearbox assembly (3, refer to Figure 1A7A – 1) is connected to a shaft

geared at each end. Within e ach seat track, the shaft gear is meshed upon a rack, providing fore/aft movement.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–16

Page 1A7A–16

Recline Movement

Seat-back recline movement is provided by the recline motor and gearbox assembly (4, refer to Figure 1A7A – 1), which

is attached to the seat-back frame. A shaft from the gearbo x is fitted with a drive gear at each end and is meshed with a

driven gear attached to each seat-back frame pivot. Motor operation causes rotation of the drive gear, which turns the

driven gear and seat-back frame, thereby altering the seat-back recline angle.

All motors reverse direction when the pol arity at the wiring terminals is reversed, resultin g in seat movement in the

opposite direction. During seat position adjustment, the drive motors will cease op eration at the end of their travel via an

internal thermal cut-out switch, even if the seat adjustment switch is held on.

Components making up the seat-back recline mechanism and track and height adjust assembly are not serviced.

Four-way and Six-way Movement Control

Four-way and six-way seat movement is controlled by a

front seat adjustment switch assembly (1), which is fitted to

the outer side of each front seat.

For the four-way seat, the switch provides indepe ndent

control of the front and rear raise/lower movements.

The six-way front seat adjustment switch provides fore/aft

movement in addition to the four- way movements.

To adjust the seat:

• Operate the switch up or down to raise/lower the seat.

• Operate the front of the switch up or down to

raise/lower the front of the seat.

• Operate the rear of the switch up or down to

raise/lower the rear of the seat.

• Operate the switch forward or backward to move the

seat fore/aft.

For further information, refer to the Owner's Handbook. Figure 1A7A – 2

Eight-way Movement Control

The eight-way front seat adjustment switch has an

additional knob (1) which provides control of the seat-back

recline movement. The knob (2) provi des the same

functions as six-way seats.

To adjust the seat recline:

• Operate the recline knob to adjust the angl e of the

seat-back. The seat-back moves in the same direction

to which the switch is moved.

For further information, refer to the Owner's Handbook.

Figure 1A7A – 3

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–17

Page 1A7A–17

Memory Seat Position System

The driver’s seat in Level 5 vehicles is fitted wit h a memory

seat position system.

The memory seat position system allo ws the driver to adjust

the seat to any of the positions stored in memory by

pressing one of the three memory buttons (1).

In addition, on keyless entry to the vehic le, the memory seat

position system through the Body Control Module (BCM),

recognises which ignition key has been used (Priority 1 or

Priority 2) and adjusts the seat position to the driver’s

preferred set position.

Audible and visual feedback for the various fu nctions of the

memory seat position system is provided. The s ystem has a

green LED and a chime which are used to i ndicate memory

saves, the recall of priority memory numbers and for seat

diagnostic procedures.

Hall-effect sensors integrated into each of the motor

assemblies are used to monit or the positi on of the seat.

Figure 1A7A – 4

The seat memory module, mounted under the front seat, has a non-volatile memory. While disconnecting the battery will

not erase the seat memory settings, the seat will require recalibrating to reset the sensor stop values within the memory

control module.

NOTE

Some of the procedures relating to memory seat

diagnosis detailed i n 4 Diagnostics – Front Seat,

Memory and Rear-view Mirror, Level 5 require

the use of both the Priority 1 Key and the Priorit y

2 Key.

Priority Keys (Level 5 Vehicles Only )

On level 5 vehicles, the driver's seat movement is a function of the priority keys. Priority key 1 and priority key 2 move the

driver's seat and exterior mirrors to the positions in which they were set when that key was last inserted into the ignition

switch. When the vehicle is unlocked usi ng the Unlock button on a priority key and that priority key is inserted into the

ignition switch, the vehicle identifies the pri ority key and:

• adjusts the position of the driver's seat,

• adjusts the position of the exterior mirrors to the last position used for that key, and

• if the mirror dip function is activated, adjusts the position of the passenger's exterior mirror when the transmission

selector is placed in reverse.

The driver's seat moves to the last position used for that priority key if:

• that was a memory button position, or

• the seat was adjusted without memorising the position.

The driver's seat moves to the alternate prio rity key position only after pressing the unlock button on the alternate priority

key. If the alternate priority key is not used to unlock the vehicle, that priority key will adjust all personalised settings (for

example, exterior mirror angles, radio and climate control), except the driver's seat.

If activated, the left exterior mirror dip function is linked to the seat and priority key memory (that is, each seat memory

position also stores the left exterior mirror DIP positio n, if activated).

For further information, refer to the Owner's Handbook.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–18

Page 1A7A–18

Memory Buttons

The seat can store three different memory settings. To recall a stored memory seat and exterior mirror position, press

and hold one of the memory buttons. After the seat has reached its memorised position, release the me mory button. If

the memory button is released before the seat reaches its memorised position, the seat stops moving.

To change a memory position:

1 Adjust the seat with the eight-way front seat adjustment switch.

2 Adjust the exterior mirrors (including the dip positio n).

3 Place the transmission selector in either park or neutral, then turn on the ignition switch.

4 Press the mirror DIP / memory store button (1, 2 or 3) within five seconds. (Two audible chimes are generated

when a new memory position has been stored.)

5 Place the transmission select or in reverse and wait for the passenger's mirror to be returned from the DIP angle to

complete saving the mirror position into memory, refer to Using the Exterior Mirrors.

Using the Exterior Mirrors

The right exterior mirror and left exterior mirror can be adjusted using the rear-view mirror switch on the driver’s door

armrest when the ignition is on.

To operate the right exterior mirror or left exterior mirror:

1 Turn on the ignition s witch.

2 Move the rocker switch on the rear-view mirror switch to the position to control the right or left exterior mirror.

3 Press the rear-view mirror switch in one of the directions indicated by one of the moulded 'dots' on the edge of the

rear-view mirror switch to move the mirror up, down, left or right.

Adjusting the DIP View

To change the mirror dip posit ion and save it in memory:

1 Turn the ignition switch on.

2 Place the transmission select or in reverse.

3 Ensure the DIP angle is switched on; the left exterior mirror moves to the current DIP position.

4 Adjust the left exterior mirror using the rear-view mirror switch.

5 Place the transmission selector out of reverse.

6 Press the mirror DIP button, then the desired memory store button (1, 2 or 3) to save the mirror dip position into

memory.

For further information, refer to the Owner's Handbook.

Toggle DIP Function On / Off

When the mirror DIP function is activated, the left exterior mirror moves to the position set, typically enabling the driver to

see the kerb more clearly. If activated, the DIP function is operational when the ignition is on and the transmission

selector placed in reverse.

To toggle between the dip view and normal view, press the mirror DIP / memory store button:

• When the DIP function is turned on, two audible chimes are generated.

• When the DIP function is turned off, one audible chime is generated.

For further information, refer to the Owner's Handbook.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–19

Page 1A7A–19

Active Head Restraints

The front seats fitted to Level 4 and 5 vehicles feature active head restraints. During a rear-end collision, active head

restraints are designed to move upward and forward to support the occupant's head and reduce neck injuries.

The impact force from the collision pushes the vehicle (and

seat) forward. As the vehicle moves forward at a speed

greater than the occupant’s body can react to, the body is

moved into the seat (A) pushing on the active hea d restraint

support strap (1).

Due to the pivoting of the active head restrain t frame (2), the

frame along with the head rest raint moves upward and

forward, supporting and limiting rearward travel of the

occupant's head.

Figure 1A7A – 5

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–20

Page 1A7A–20

1.2 Rear Seat General Description

Depending on vehicl e Model Level, the rear seats fitted may feature:

• The option of a two or three passenger rear seat cushion for Level 5,

• A first aid kit pouch in the right-hand rear seat-back assembl y, Levels 4 a nd 5,

• Centre arm rest with deposit box and cup holder, Levels 4 and 5,

• Standard leather trim for Levels 3 and 5 and optional for Levels 2 and 4,

• Centre head restraint for Levels 3 – 5.

Seat Covers

Three seat cover construction methods are us ed for the rear seat assemblies:

• Surebond

• Hook and Loop

• Conventional Pull-down

Surebond

Surebond rear seat assemblies are fitted to Level 1 vehicles and have cloth covers that are not serviced separatel y, as

they are glued to the rear seat cushion and seat-back pads.

Hook and loop

Hook and loop rear seat assemblies are fitted to Level 3 vehicles are fully serviced. They are attached to the rear seat

cushion and seat-back pads using a hook and loop system.

Conventional pull-down

Conventional pull-down rear seat assemblies are fitted to Level 2, 4 and 5 vehicles. Retainer wires are fitted within

casings that are part of the rear seat covers. Hog rings are then used to attach the covers to wires that are moulded

within the cushion or seat-back pads.

For all vehicles, the rear seat cushion frame is serviceable and attaches to the cushion cover retainer wires with hog

rings. The rear seat-back assemblies have the frame moulded as part of the rear seat-back cushion pad and if a

replacement of either part is required, the pad and frame need to be replaced as an assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–21

Page 1A7A–21

2 Diagnostics – Front Seat,

Level 1

This Section provides charts to assist in the diagnosis and repa ir of front seats. Refer to 5.1 Usage Ch art , for a full listing

of the different types of seats fitted to vehicles. Included in that Section are illustrated parts breakdowns of the various

seats.

2.1 Prerequisites

Safety Requirements

When operating the seat as part of any Steps

in the diagnostic tables, ensure that fingers

and limbs are clear of mo ving parts.

Equipment

The following equipment is required to diagnose the seats:

• An unpowered test lamp with a current dra w of less than 3 A.

• A digital multimeter with a minimum impedance of 10 MΩ.

Testing Procedures

The following points must be adhered to

when performing diagnostic testing on

components:

• Take care when using testing equipment

to diagnose wiring harness connectors. It

is preferred that the technician backprobe

the connector to avoid terminal damage.

• When tests are required on connector

terminals, use the adapters in the

connector adapter kit KM–609 to prevent

damage to the terminals.

• Unless the multimeter being used has an

auto-ranging function, ensure the correct

range is selected.

• When backpro bing connectors, ensure the

test lamp ground lead is connected to an

appropriate ground point on the vehicle.

Ensure this ground point is not part of the

circuit being tested.

NOTE

When following the steps in th e diagnostic tables,

perform them in the order cited. If the required

nominal value or result is not achi eved, rectif y t he

problem before proceeding any further.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–22

Page 1A7A–22

2.2 Mechanical Diagnosis

Lumbar Support Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the lumbar support assembly.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the lumbar support knob is properly engaging the lumbar support adjuster. Check the knob for cracks and

worn splines.

2 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is damage d or worn and if the retaining springs are serviceable and

securely attached to the seat-back frame assembly.

3 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is serviceable and if the lumber support assembly strap is operating

correctly within the guide rails.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Remove the lumbar support knob, refer to 5.9 Lumbar Su pport Knob

Assembly.

Is the lumbar support adjust knob serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the knob,

refer to 5.9 Lumbar

Support Knob

Assembly

2 1 Remove the seat-back cover.

2 Inspect the lumbar support retainers and spri ngs.

Are the lumbar support retaining spri ngs serviceable and securely

attached to the seat-back frame assembly? Go to Step 3

Replace or reattach

the retaining

springs, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

3 1 Visually inspect the lumbar support assembly. Check for broken

or worn parts.

2 Check the strap running across the lumber s upport assembly is

serviceable and running freely within the guide rails.

NOTE

You may need to attach the lumber support knob to

actuate the strap.

Is the lumbar support assembly serviceabl e? System serviceable

Replace lumbar

support assembly or

resecure lumbar

support assembly

strap ensuring strap

is not binding with

guide rails, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–23

Page 1A7A–23

Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the recline function of the seat assembly.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the recliner knob is properly engaging the recliner shaft. Check the knob for cracks and worn splines.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Remove the recliner knob, refer to 5.4 F ront Seat Outer Side Cover

Assembly.

Is the recliner knob serviceable?

Replace the front

seat-back frame

assembly, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

Replace the recliner

knob, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Four-way Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or is Not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosi ng the fore/aft movement function of the seat being inoperative or the action of the seat

through the range of movement is not smooth.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

2 Checks if the guide rails have adequate lubricant appli ed to provide a smooth operation for the seat.

3 Checks if the linkage assembly between the adjustment lever and locking tangs is worn or damaged. The lockin g

tangs must disengage from the guide rails be fore the seat will move.

4 Checks if the guide rails have been damaged. Any binding b etween the inner and outer guide rails will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 2 Remove the

obstructing item

2 Are the guide rails adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 3

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide) to the rails

3 Do the locking tangs disengage the guide rails when the sea t fore and

aft adjustment lever is raised to its full movement?

Go to Step 4

Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly

4 Do the guide rails bind at any point of travel during the fore and aft

movements of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly System serviceable

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–24

Page 1A7A–24

2.3 Electrical Diagnosis – Four-way/Six-way

Seat

The charts in this Section are used to aid in diagnosing faults on four-way and six-way seat assemblies. To aid in the use

of the diagnostic tables, refer to Wiring Diagram – Four-way/Six-way Seat and

Connector Chart – Four- way/Six-way Seat.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–25

Page 1A7A–25

Wiring Diagram – Four-way/Six-way Seat

Figure 1A7A – 6

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–26

Page 1A7A–26

Connector Chart – Four-way/Six-way Seat

Figure 1A7A – 7

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–27

Page 1A7A–27

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the seat power and ground circuits, if neither seat operates when either seat

adjustment switch is operated.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if battery voltage is more than 11.5 V. The seat motors require mo re than 11.5 V to operate correctly.

2 Checks if circuit breaker F2 located on the passenger com partment fuse and relay panel assembl y is tripped.

Isolates if circuit breaker F2 is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and conne ctor X200 pin 19.

3 Checks if fusible link F105 located on the engine compartment fuse and relay panel assembly is serviceable.

Isolates if the fusible link is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and connector X200 pin 19.

4 Checks if connector X200 is secure.

5 Checks if there is battery voltage at connector X200 pin 19. Isolates if the fault is between the battery and

connector X200 pin 19. If the fault in the circuit is between connectors X200 pin 19 and either X3 08 pin 3 or

X302 pin B, only o ne seat will operate.

6 Checks if there is battery voltage at circuit breaker F2. Isolates whether the fault is between the b attery and circuit

breaker F2 or bet ween circuit breaker F2 an d connector X200 pin 19.

7 Checks if there is battery voltage at fusible link F105. Isolates whether the fault is between the battery and fusible

link F105 or between fusible li nk F 105 and circuit breaker F2.

8 Checks if the ground point associated with the system is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–28

Page 1A7A–28

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Check the battery voltage, refer to Section 12A Battery.

Is the battery voltage more than 11.5 V? Go to Step 2

Refer to Section

12A Battery for

further diagnosis

2 Inspect circuit breaker F2, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is circuit breaker F2 tripped?

Allow the circuit

breaker to reset

(refer to Note 3).

If the circuit breaker

trips again, repair or

replace circuit 540

(refer to Note 2) Go to Step 3

3 Inspect fusible link F105, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is fuse F105 serviceable?

Go to Step 4

Replace the fusible

link.

If the fusible link

becomes

unserviceable

again, repair or

replace circuit 342

(refer to Note 2)

4 Is connector X200 secure (refer to Note 3)? Go to Step 5 Ensure the

connector is secure

5 Backprobe connector X200 pin 19 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6

6 1 Remove circuit breaker F2 from the passenger compartment

fuse and relay panel assembly.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X12 9 - X45 – 2 (refer to Note

1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

circuit breaker F2

and connector

X200 pin 19 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 7

7 1 Remove fusible link F105.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X18-105 (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 342 between

fusible link F105

and circuit breaker

F2 (refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 1 between

the battery and

fusible link F105

(refer to Note 2)

8 Ensure ground point X118 – GP12 (located in the middle of the

transmission tunnel) is secure and has good contact with the vehicle

structure.

Is the ground point secure to the vehicle with a good contact?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2) Repair ground point

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–29

Page 1A7A–29

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the driver’s seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate. The

test diagnoses the driver’s seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the passenger's seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the driver’s

seat only.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X308 pi n 3. Isolates if there i s a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X308 pin 3.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S50 – X1 pi n 7. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S50 – X1 pin 7 and X308 p in 3.

5 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connectors S50 – X1 pin 6 and X308 pin 1 which supplies the ground circuit

for the driver’s seat adjustment switch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the switch and

connector X308 pin 1 or between connector X308 pin 1 and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–30

Page 1A7A–30

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the passenger’s seat adjustment switch functions

inoperative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X308 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

X200 pin 19 an d

X308 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S50

• X308

• Y64

• Y67

• Y69 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S50 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S50 – X1 pin 7 and

X308 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 2.5 Six-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 8 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X308 pin

1 and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S50 – X1 pin 6 and

X308 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–31

Page 1A7A–31

Front/Rear of the Driver's Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the driver's seat not raising and/or lowering. The test

diagnoses the seat adjustmen t switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver's seat adjustment switch assembly operates the seat in any direction. Isolates whether there is

a battery or ground fault affecting the seat operation.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the driver's seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the seat rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the seat front lift motor and circuit of the seat is

the fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 282 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 283 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6 is

serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 286 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 287 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–32

Page 1A7A–32

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver's seat adjustm ent switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the six directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S50

• Y67

• Y69 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the driver's seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver's seat adjustment s witch, refer to 2.5 Six-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver's seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the driver's

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

4 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the rear

of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the front

of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to raise the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 282 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to lower the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 283 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to raise the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 286 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver's seat adjustment switch to lower the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 287 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–33

Page 1A7A–33

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosi ng the fore/aft movement function of the driver’s seat being inoperative or the action of

the seat through the range of movement is not smooth. The test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor

circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direct ion. Isolates if there is battery power to

the switch assembly.

2 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails, which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

3 Checks if the guide rails and drive shafts have adequate lubricant applied t o provide a smooth operation of the

seat.

4 Checks if the guide rails or drive shafts have been damaged. An y binding between the moving parts will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

5 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

6 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 2. Isolates if there

is a fault in circuit 285 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat forward.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 1. Isolates whether

the fault is in circuit 284 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 7 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–34

Page 1A7A–34

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the six directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 3 Remove the

obstructing item

3 Are the guide rails and driv e shafts adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 4

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide)

4 Do the guide rails or drive shafts bind at any point of travel during the

fore and aft movement of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly Go to Step 5

5 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S50

• Y64 Go to Step 6

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

6 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 2.5 Six-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 7

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

7 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 285 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 284 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–35

Page 1A7A–35

None of the Passenger's Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the passenger's seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate.

The test diagnoses the passenger's seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the driver's seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the passenger's

seat.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X302 pin B. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X302 pin B.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S175 – X1 pin 7. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S175 – X1 pin 7 and X302 pin B.

5 Checks if the passenger's seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connec tors S175 – X1 pin 6 and X302 pin A which supp lies the ground circuit

for the passenger's seat adjustment switch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the s witch and

connector X302 pin A or between connector X302 pin A and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–36

Page 1A7A–36

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the driver's seat adjustment s witch functions inoperative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X302 pin B with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

X200 pin 19 an d

X302 pin B (refer to

Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S175

• X302

• Y84

• Y86 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S175 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S175 – X1 pin 7 and

X302 pin B (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the passenger's seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger's seat adjustment switch, refer to 2.4 Four-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger's seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the

passenger's seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 2 pin A with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X302 pin

A and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S175 – X1 pin 6 and

X302 pin A (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–37

Page 1A7A–37

Front/Rear of the Passenger's Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the passenger's seat not raising and/or lowering. The

test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger's seat adjustment switch assembly operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if there is a

battery or ground fault affecting the seat operation.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place and positively connected.

3 Checks if the passenger's seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the seat rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the seat front lift motor and circuit of the seat is

the fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 288 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 289 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6 is

serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 297 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 298 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–38

Page 1A7A–38

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger's seat adjustment switch operate the seat

correctly in any of the four directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger's Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S175

• Y84

• Y86 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the passenger's seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger's adjustm ent switch, refer to 2.4 Four-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger's seat adjustment s witch serviceable ? Go to Step 4

Replace the

passenger's seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

4 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the

front of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to raise the rear

of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 288 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 289 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to raise the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 297 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger's seat adjustment switch to lower the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 298 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–39

Page 1A7A–39

2.4 Four-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test

The switch is located on the outer side of the seat, attached to the inner side of the front seat outer side cover.

Test

1 Remove the four-way seat adjustment switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Place the switch in the positions as detailed i n the

chart in this Section. Place the probes of the

ohmmeter onto the terminals listed and take the

reading. Compare the reading to the chart.

3 If the switch fails any part of the test, replace the

switch assembly with a serviceable item.

4 Install the four-way seat adjustment s witch, refer to

5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 8

Four-way Seat Adjustment Switch

Switch Position Sw itch Terminals Indication if Switch is Serviceable

Position A 3 and 7 Continuity

Position B 2 and 7 Continuity

Position C 4 and 7 Continuity

Position D 1 and 7 Continuity

Switch in the neutral position 6 and either 1, 2, 3 or 4 Continuity

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–40

Page 1A7A–40

2.5 Six-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test

The switch is located on the outer side of the seat, attached to the inner side of the front seat outer side cover.

Test

1 Remove the six-way seat adjustment switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Place the switch in the positions as detailed i n the

chart in this Section. Place the probes of the

ohmmeter onto the terminals listed and take the

reading. Compare the reading to the chart.

3 If the switch fails any part of the test, replace the

switch assembly with a serviceable item.

4 Install the six-way seat adjust ment switch, refer to

5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 9

Six-way Seat Adjustment Switch

Switch Position Sw itch Terminals Indication if Switch is Serviceable

Position A 2 and 7 Continuity

Position B 3 and 7 Continuity

Position C 1 and 7 Continuity

Position D 4 and 7 Continuity

Position E 8 and 7 Continuity

Position F 5 and 7 Continuity

Switch in the neutral position 6 and either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 Continuity

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–41

Page 1A7A–41

3 Diagnostics – Front Seat,

Level 2, 3, 4 and 5

This Section provides charts to assist in the diagnosis and repa ir of front seats. Refer to 5.1 Usage Ch art , for a full listing

of the different types of seats fitted to vehicles. Included in that Section are illustrated parts breakdowns of the various

seats.

3.1 Prerequisites

Safety Requirements

When operating the seat as part of any Steps

in the diagnostic tables, ensure that fingers

and limbs are clear of mo ving parts.

Equipment

The following equipment is required to diagnose the seats:

• An unpowered test lamp with a current dra w of less than 3 A.

• A digital multimeter with a minimum impedance of 10 MΩ.

Testing Procedures

The following points must be adhered to

when performing diagnostic testing on

components:

• Take care when using testing equipment

to diagnose wiring harness connectors. It

is preferred that the technician backprobe

the connector to avoid terminal damage.

• When tests are required on connector

terminals, use the adapters in the

connector adapter kit KM–609 to prevent

damage to the terminals.

• Unless the multimeter being used has an

auto-ranging function, ensure the correct

range is selected.

• When backpro bing connectors, ensure the

test lamp ground lead is connected to an

appropriate ground point on the vehicle.

Ensure this ground point is not part of the

circuit being tested.

NOTE

When following the steps in th e diagnostic tables,

perform them in the order cited. If the required

nominal value or result is not achi eved, rectif y t he

problem before proceeding any further.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–42

Page 1A7A–42

3.2 Mechanical Diagnosis

Lumbar Support Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the lumbar support assembly.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the lumbar support knob is properly engaging the lumbar support adjuster. Check the knob for cracks and

worn splines.

2 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is damage d or worn and if the retaining springs are serviceable and

securely attached to the seat-back frame assembly.

3 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is serviceable and if the lumber support assembly strap is operating

correctly within the guide rails.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Remove the lumbar support knob, refer to 5.9 Lumbar Su pport Knob

Assembly.

Is the lumbar support adjust knob serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the knob,

refer to 5.9 Lumbar

Support Knob

Assembly

2 1 Remove the seat-back cover.

2 Inspect the lumbar support retainers and spri ngs.

Are the lumbar support retaining spri ngs serviceable and securely

attached to the seat-back frame assembly? Go to Step 3

Replace or reattach

the retaining

springs, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

3 1 Visually inspect the lumbar support assembly. Check for broken

or worn parts.

2 Check the strap running across the lumber s upport assembly is

serviceable and running freely within the guide rails.

NOTE

You may need to attach the lumber support knob to

actuate the strap.

Is the lumbar support assembly serviceabl e? System serviceable

Replace lumbar

support assembly or

resecure lumbar

support assembly

strap ensuring strap

is not binding with

guide rails, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–43

Page 1A7A–43

3.3 Electrical Diagnosis – Eight-way Seat,

Non-memory, RHD

The charts in this Section are used to aid in diagnosing faul ts on eight-way non-memory seat assemblies. To aid in the

use of the diagnostic tables, refer to Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD and

Connector Chart – Eight- way Seat, Non-memory, RHD.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–44

Page 1A7A–44

Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD

Figure 1A7A – 10

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–45

Page 1A7A–45

Connector Chart – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, RHD

Figure 1A7A – 11

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–46

Page 1A7A–46

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the seat power and ground circuits, if neither seat operates when either seat

adjustment switch is operated.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if battery voltage is more than 11.5 V. The seat motors require mo re than 11.5 V to operate correctly.

2 Checks if circuit breaker F2 located on the passenger com partment fuse and relay panel assembl y is tripped.

Isolates if circuit breaker F2 is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and conne ctor X200 pin 19.

3 Checks if fusible link F105 located on the engine compartment fuse and relay panel assembly is serviceable.

Isolates if the fusible link is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and connector X200 pin 19.

4 Checks if connector X200 is secure.

5 Checks if there is battery voltage at connector X200 pin 19. Isolates if the fault is between the battery and

connector X200 pin 19. If the fault in the circuit is between connectors X200 pin 19 and either X3 02 pin 3 or

X308 pin B, only o ne seat will operate.

6 Checks if there is battery voltage at circuit breaker F2. Isolates whether the fault is between the b attery and circuit

breaker F2 or bet ween circuit breaker F2 an d connector X200 pin 19.

7 Checks if there is battery voltage at fusible link F105. Isolates whether the fault is between the battery and fusible

link F105 or between fusible li nk F 105 and circuit breaker F2.

8 Checks if the ground point associated with the system is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–47

Page 1A7A–47

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Check the battery voltage, refer to Section 12A Battery.

Is the battery voltage more than 11.5 V? Go to Step 2

Refer to Section

12A Battery for

further diagnosis

2 Inspect circuit breaker F2, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is circuit breaker F2 tripped?

Allow the circuit

breaker to reset

(refer to Note 3).

If the circuit breaker

trips again, repair or

replace circuit 540

(refer to Note 2) Go to Step 3

3 Inspect fusible link F105, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is fuse F105 serviceable?

Go to Step 4

Replace the fusible

link.

If the fusible link

becomes

unserviceable

again, repair or

replace circuit 342

(refer to Note 2)

4 Is connector X200 secure (refer to Note 3)? Go to Step 5 Ensure the

connector is secure

5 Backprobe connector X200 pin 19 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6

6 1 Remove circuit breaker F2 from the passenger compartment

fuse and relay panel assembly.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X12 9 – X45 pin – 2 (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

circuit breaker F2

and connector

X200 pin 19 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 7

7 1 Remove fusible link F105.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X18-105 (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 342 between

fusible link F105

and circuit breaker

F2 (refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 1 between

the battery and

fusible link F105

(refer to Note 2)

8 Ensure ground point X118 – GP12 (located in the middle of the

transmission tunnel) is secure and has good contact with the vehicle

structure.

Is the ground point secure to the vehicle with a good contact?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2) Repair ground point

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–48

Page 1A7A–48

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the driver’s seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate. The

test diagnoses the driver’s seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the passenger seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the driver’s seat.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X302 pi n 3. Isolates if there i s a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X302 pin 3.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S51 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S51 – X1 pin 5 and X302 p in 3.

5 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connectors S51 – X1 pin 1 and X302 pin 1 which supplies the ground circuit

for the driver’s seat adjustment switch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the switch and

connector X302 pin 1 or between connector X302 pin 1 and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–49

Page 1A7A–49

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the passenger’s seat adjustment switch functions

inoperative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X302 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

X200 pin 19 an d

X302 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• X302

• Y64

• Y67

• Y69

• Y74 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 5 and

X302 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 2 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X302 pin

1 and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 1 and

X302 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–50

Page 1A7A–50

Front/Rear of the Driver’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the driver’s seat not raising and/or lowering. T he test

diagnoses the seat adjustmen t switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if the power and ground

circuits are at fault.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the seat rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the seat front lift motor and circuit of the seat is

the fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 282 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 283 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6

is serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 286 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 287 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8

is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–51

Page 1A7A–51

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y67

• Y69 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

4 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the rear

of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the front

of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 282 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to lower the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 283 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 286 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to lower the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 287 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–52

Page 1A7A–52

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosi ng the fore/aft movement function of the driver’s seat being inoperative or the action of

the seat through the range of movement is not smooth. The test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor

circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direct ion. Isolates if there is battery power to

the switch assembly.

2 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails, which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

3 Checks if the guide rails and drive shafts have adequate lubricant applied t o provide a smooth operation of the

seat.

4 Checks if the guide rails or drive shafts have been damaged. An y binding between the moving parts will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

5 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

6 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 2. Isolates if there

is a fault in circuit 285 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat forward.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 1. Isolates whether

the fault is in circuit 284 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 7 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–53

Page 1A7A–53

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 3 Remove the

obstructing item

3 Are the guide rails and driv e shafts adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 4

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide)

4 Do the guide rails or drive shafts bind at any point of travel during the

fore and aft movement of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly Go to Step 5

5 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y64 Go to Step 6

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

6 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 7

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

7 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 285 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 284 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–54

Page 1A7A–54

Driver’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the recline function of the driver’s seat being inoperative. The test diagnoses the

seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direct ion. Isolates if there is battery power to

the switch assembly.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connect or Y74 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a

fault in circuit 276 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back forward.

5 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 276 between connectors S51 – X1 pin 2 and X314 pin 1 or between

connectors X314 pin 1 and Y74 – X1 pin 1.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connector Y74 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates whether the

fault is in circuit 277 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 4 is

serviceable.

7 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 277 between connectors S51 – X1 pin 4 and X314 pin 2 or between

connectors X314 pin 2 and Y74 – X1 pin 5.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–55

Page 1A7A–55

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y74 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

4 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 1 Backprobe connector X31 4 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

X314 pin 1 and

Y74 – X1 pin 1

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 2 and

X314 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the

seat-back recline

motor, refer to 5.18

Front Seat-back

Recline Motor

Assembly Go to Step 7

7 1 Backprobe connector X31 4 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

X314 pin 2 and

Y74 – X1 pin 5

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 4 and

X314 pin 2 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–56

Page 1A7A–56

None of the Passenger’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the passenger’s seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate.

The test diagnoses the passenger’s seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the driver’s seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the passenger’s

seat.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X308 pin B. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X308 pin B.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S176 – X1 pin 5. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S176 – X1 pin 5 and X308 pin B.

5 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connec tors S176 – X1 pin 1 and X308 pin A which supp lies the ground circuit

for the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the switch and

connector X308 pin A or between connector X308 pin A and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–57

Page 1A7A–57

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the driver’s seat adjustment switch functions inoper ative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X308 pin B with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin

19 and X308 pin B

(refer to Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• X308

• Y81

• Y84

• Y86

• Y91 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S176 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 5 and

X308 pin B (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 8 pin A with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X308 pin

A and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 1 and

X308 pin A (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–58

Page 1A7A–58

Front/Rear of the Passenger’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the passenger’s seat not raising and/or lowering. The

test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates whether the power

and/or ground circuits are at fault.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the front lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 288 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 289 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6

is serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 297 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 298 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8

is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–59

Page 1A7A–59

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y84

• Y86 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

4 Operate the passenger’s seat adj ustment switch to raise or lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the passenger’s seat adj ustment switch to raise or lower the

front of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to raise the rear

of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 288 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 289 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to raise the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 297 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to lower the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 298 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–60

Page 1A7A–60

Passenger’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the fore/aft movement function of the passenger’s seat being in operative or the

action of the seat through the range of movement is not smooth. The test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the

motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if there is battery

power to the switch assembly.

2 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails, which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

3 Checks if the guide rails and drive shafts have adequate lubricant applied t o provide a smooth operation of the

seat.

4 Checks if the guide rails or drive shafts have been damaged. An y binding between the moving parts will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

5 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

6 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y81 – X1 pin 2. Isolates if there

is a fault in circuit 296 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat forward.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y81 – X1 pin 1. Isolates whether

the fault is in circuit 290 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 7 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–61

Page 1A7A–61

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 3 Remove the

obstructing item

3 Are the guide rails and driv e shafts adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 4

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide)

4 Do the guide rails or drive shafts bind at any point of travel during the

fore and aft movement of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly Go to Step 5

5 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y81 Go to Step 6

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

6 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 7

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

7 1 Backprobe connector Y81 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 296 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y81 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 290 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–62

Page 1A7A–62

Passenger’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the recline function of the passenger’s seat being inoperative. T he test diagnoses

the seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if there is battery

power to the switch assembly.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connect or Y91 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a

fault in circuit 76 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back forward.

5 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 76 between connectors S176 – X1 pin 2 and X323 pin 1 or between

connectors X323 pin 1 and Y91 – X1 pin 1.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connector Y91 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates whether the

fault is in circuit 77 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 4 is

serviceable.

7 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 77 between connectors S176 – X1 pin 4 and X323 pin 2 or between

connectors X323 pin 2 and Y91 – X1 pin 5.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–63

Page 1A7A–63

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y91 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

4 1 Backprobe connector Y91 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 1 Backprobe connector X32 3 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 76 between

connectors

X323 pin 1 and

Y91 – X1 pin 1

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 76 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 2 and

X323 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Backprobe connector Y91 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the front

seat-back recline

motor, refer to 5.18

Front Seat-back

Recline Motor

Assembly Go to Step 7

7 1 Backprobe connector X32 3 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 77 between

connectors

X323 pin 2 and

Y91 – X1 pin 5

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 77 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 4 and

X323 pin 2 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–64

Page 1A7A–64

3.4 Electrical Diagnosis – Eight-way Seat,

Non-memory, LHD

The charts in this Section are used to aid in diagnosing faul ts on eight-way non-memory seat assemblies. To aid in the

use of the diagnostic tables, refer to Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD and

Connector Chart – Eight- way Seat, Non-memory, LHD.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–65

Page 1A7A–65

Wiring Diagram – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD

Figure 1A7A – 12

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–66

Page 1A7A–66

Connector Chart – Eight-way Seat, Non-memory, LHD

Figure 1A7A – 13

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–67

Page 1A7A–67

Neither Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the seat power and ground circuits, if neither seat operates when either seat

adjustment switch is operated.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if battery voltage is more than 11.5 V. The seat motors require mo re than 11.5 V to operate correctly.

2 Checks if circuit breaker F2 located on the passenger com partment fuse and relay panel assembl y is tripped.

Isolates if circuit breaker F2 is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and conne ctor X200 pin 19.

3 Checks if fusible link F105 located on the engine compartment fuse and relay panel assembly is serviceable.

Isolates if the fusible link is the fault affecting the circuit between the battery and connector X200 pin 19.

4 Checks if connector X200 is secure.

5 Checks if there is battery voltage at connector X200 pin 19. Isolates if the fault is between the battery and

connector X200 pin 19. If the fault in the circuit is between connectors X200 pin 19 and either X3 08 pin 3 or

X302 pin B, only o ne seat will operate.

6 Checks if there is battery voltage at circuit breaker F2. Isolates whether the fault is between the b attery and circuit

breaker F2 or bet ween circuit breaker F2 an d connector X200 pin 19.

7 Checks if there is battery voltage at fusible link F105. Isolates whether the fault is between the battery and fusible

link F105 or between fusible li nk F 105 and circuit breaker F2.

8 Checks if the ground point associated with the system is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–68

Page 1A7A–68

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Check the battery voltage, refer to Section 12A Battery.

Is the battery voltage more than 11.5 V? Go to Step 2

Refer to Section

12A Battery for

further diagnosis

2 Inspect circuit breaker F2, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is circuit breaker F2 tripped?

Allow the circuit

breaker to reset

(refer to Note 3).

If the circuit breaker

trips again, repair or

replace circuit 540

(refer to Note 2) Go to Step 3

3 Inspect fusible link F105, refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and

Wiring Harnesses.

Is fuse F105 serviceable?

Go to Step 4

Replace the fusible

link.

If the fusible link

becomes

unserviceable

again, repair or

replace circuit 342

(refer to Note 2)

4 Is connector X200 secure (refer to Note 3)? Go to Step 5 Ensure the

connector is secure

5 Backprobe connector X200 pin 19 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6

6 1 Remove circuit breaker F2 from the passenger compartment

fuse and relay panel assembly.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X12 9 – X45 pin – 2 (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

circuit breaker F2

and connector

X200 pin 19 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 7

7 1 Remove fusible link F105.

2 Using a test lamp, probe connector X18-105 (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 342 between

fusible link F105

and circuit breaker

F2 (refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 1 between

the battery and

fusible link F105

(refer to Note 2)

8 Ensure ground point X118 – GP12 (located in the middle of the

transmission tunnel) is secure and has good contact with the vehicle

structure.

Is the ground point secure to the vehicle with a good contact?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2) Repair ground point

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–69

Page 1A7A–69

None of the Driver’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the driver’s seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate. The

test diagnoses the driver’s seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the passenger seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the driver’s seat.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X308 pi n 3. Isolates if there i s a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X308 pin 3.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S51 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S51 – X1 pin 5 and X308 p in 3.

5 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connectors S51 – X1 pin 1 and X308 pin 1 which supplies the ground circuit

for the driver’s seat adjustment switch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the switch and

connector X308 pin 1 or between connector X308 pin 1 and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–70

Page 1A7A–70

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the passenger’s seat adjustment switch functions

inoperative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X308 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

X200 pin 19 an d

X308 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• X308

• Y64

• Y67

• Y69

• Y74 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 5 and

X308 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 8 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X308 pin

1 and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 1 and

X308 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–71

Page 1A7A–71

Front/Rear of the Driver’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the driver’s seat not raising and/or lowering. T he test

diagnoses the seat adjustmen t switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if the power and ground

circuits are at fault.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the seat rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the seat front lift motor and circuit of the seat is

the fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 282 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y69 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 283 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6

is serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 286 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y67 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 287 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8

is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–72

Page 1A7A–72

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y67

• Y69 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

4 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the rear

of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the front

of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 282 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to lower the rear of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 283 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to raise the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 286 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to lower the front of

the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 287 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–73

Page 1A7A–73

Driver’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosi ng the fore/aft movement function of the driver’s seat being inoperative or the action of

the seat through the range of movement is not smooth. The test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor

circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direct ion. Isolates if there is battery power to

the switch assembly.

2 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails, which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

3 Checks if the guide rails and drive shafts have adequate lubricant applied t o provide a smooth operation of the

seat.

4 Checks if the guide rails or drive shafts have been damaged. An y binding between the moving parts will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

5 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

6 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 2. Isolates if there

is a fault in circuit 285 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat forward.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y64 – X1 pin 1. Isolates whether

the fault is in circuit 284 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 7 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–74

Page 1A7A–74

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 3 Remove the

obstructing item

3 Are the guide rails and driv e shafts adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 4

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide)

4 Do the guide rails or drive shafts bind at any point of travel during the

fore and aft movement of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly Go to Step 5

5 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y64 Go to Step 6

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

6 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 7

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

7 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 285 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 284 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–75

Page 1A7A–75

Driver’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the recline function of the driver’s seat being inoperative. The test diagnoses the

seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direct ion. Isolates if there is battery power to

the switch assembly.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the driver’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connect or Y74 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a

fault in circuit 276 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back forward.

5 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 276 between connectors S51 – X1 pin 2 and X314 pin 1 or between

connectors X314 pin 1 and Y74 – X1 pin 1.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connector Y74 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates whether the

fault is in circuit 277 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 4 is

serviceable.

7 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 277 between connectors S51 – X1 pin 4 and X314 pin 2 or between

connectors X314 pin 2 and Y74 – X1 pin 5.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–76

Page 1A7A–76

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the driver’s seat adjustment switch operate the seat correctly in

any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Driver’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S51

• Y74 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the driver’s seat adjustment switch from the seat, refer

to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the driver’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way

Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the driver’s seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the driver’s

seat adjustment

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

4 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 1 Backprobe connector X31 4 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

X314 pin 1 and

Y74 – X1 pin 1

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 2 and

X314 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the driver’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the

seat-back recline

motor, refer to 5.18

Front Seat-back

Recline Motor

Assembly Go to Step 7

7 1 Backprobe connector X31 4 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

X314 pin 2 and

Y74 – X1 pin 5

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

S51 – X1 pin 4 and

X314 pin 2 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–77

Page 1A7A–77

None of the Passenger’s Seat Adjustment Switch Functions Operate

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the passenger’s seat adjustment switch when none of the switch functions operate.

The test diagnoses the passenger’s seat adjustment switch and associated power and ground circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if all of the driver’s seat functions work. If none of them work, the fault is not isolated to the passenger’s

seat.

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector X302 pin B. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin 19 and X302 pin B.

3 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

4 Checks if there is battery power at connector S176 – X1 pin 5. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors S176 – X1 pin 5 and X302 pin B.

5 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if there is continuity between connec tors S176 – X1 pin 1 and X302 pin A which supp lies the ground circuit

for the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 650 between the switch and

connector X302 pin A or between connector X302 pin A and the ground point.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–78

Page 1A7A–78

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the driver’s seat adjustment switch functions inoper ative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in this

Section Go to Step 2

2 Backprobe connector X302 pin B with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors X200 pin

19 and X302 pin B

(refer to Note 2)

3 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• X302

• Y81

• Y84

• Y86

• Y91 Go to Step 4

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

4 Backprobe connector S176 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 5 and

X302 pin B (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

6 1 Backprobe connector X30 2 pin A with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch in any of the

available directions.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connector X302 pin

A and ground point

X118 – GP12 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 1 and

X302 pin A (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–79

Page 1A7A–79

Front/Rear of the Passenger’s Seat Does Not Raise and/or Lower

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the front and/or the rear of the passenger’s seat not raising and/or lowering. The

test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates whether the power

and/or ground circuits are at fault.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Confirms whether the rear of the seat raises or lowers. Isolates if the rear lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

5 Confirms whether the front of the seat raises or lo wers. Isolates if the front lift motor and circuit of the seat is the

fault.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 288 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the rear of the seat.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat rear lift motor at connector Y86 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 289 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 6

is serviceable.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 297 that supplies battery po wer to the motor to raise the front of the seat.

9 Checks if there is battery power to the seat front lift motor at connector Y84 – X1 pin 5. Isolates whether the fault is

in circuit 298 that supplies battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat or the motor is faulty. As the

direction of the motor is changed by reversing the polarity, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 8

is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–80

Page 1A7A–80

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y84

• Y86 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

4 Operate the passenger’s seat adj ustment switch to raise or lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the rear of the seat raise and lo wer? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Operate the passenger’s seat adj ustment switch to raise or lower the

front of the seat.

Does the front of the seat raise and lower? System serviceable Go to Step 8

6 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to raise the rear

of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 288 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Backprobe connector Y86 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to lower the

rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 289 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to raise the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 297 (refer to

Note 2)

9 1 Backprobe connector Y84 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to lower the

front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 298 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–81

Page 1A7A–81

Passenger’s Seat Fore/Aft Movement Function is Inoperative or Not Smooth

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the fore/aft movement function of the passenger’s seat being in operative or the

action of the seat through the range of movement is not smooth. The test diagnoses the seat adjustment switch and the

motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if there is battery

power to the switch assembly.

2 Checks if there are any items obstructing the guide rails, which may stop or hinder the seat movement.

3 Checks if the guide rails and drive shafts have adequate lubricant applied t o provide a smooth operation of the

seat.

4 Checks if the guide rails or drive shafts have been damaged. An y binding between the moving parts will result in

poor operation of the fore and aft movement.

5 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

6 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

7 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y81 – X1 pin 2. Isolates if there

is a fault in circuit 296 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat forward.

8 Checks if there is battery power to the seat fore/aft movement motor at connector Y81 – X1 pin 1. Isolates whether

the fault is in circuit 290 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 7 is

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–82

Page 1A7A–82

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the guide rails free from obstructions? Go to Step 3 Remove the

obstructing item

3 Are the guide rails and driv e shafts adequately lubricated?

Go to Step 4

Apply a small

amount of grease

type NLGI No. 1

Lithium Grease

(with 9% Zinc

Oxide)

4 Do the guide rails or drive shafts bind at any point of travel during the

fore and aft movement of the seat? Replace the track

and height adjust

assembly, refer to

5.13 Track and

Height Adjust

Assembly Go to Step 5

5 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y81 Go to Step 6

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

6 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 7

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

7 1 Backprobe connector Y81 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 296 (refer to

Note 2)

8 1 Backprobe connector Y81 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 290 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–83

Page 1A7A–83

Passenger’s Seat-back Recline Forward and/or Aft Function is Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the recline function of the passenger’s seat being inoperative. T he test diagnoses

the seat adjustment switch and the motor circuits.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch operates the seat in any direction. Isolates if there is battery

power to the switch assembly.

2 Checks if all the connectors required for the seat to operate effectively are in place a nd positively connected.

3 Checks if the passenger’s seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connect or Y91 – X1 pin 1. Isolates if there is a

fault in circuit 76 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back forward.

5 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 76 between connectors S176 – X1 pin 2 and X323 pin 1 or between

connectors X323 pin 1 and Y91 – X1 pin 1.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the seat-back recline motor at connector Y91 – X1 pi n 5. Isolates whether the

fault is in circuit 77 that supplies battery power to the motor to move the seat-back aft or the motor is faulty. As

reversing the polarity changes the direction of the motor, this Step also confirms if the ground circuit from Step 4 is

serviceable.

7 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 77 between connectors S176 – X1 pin 4 and X323 pin 2 or between

connectors X323 pin 2 and Y91 – X1 pin 5.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–84

Page 1A7A–84

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Does the passenger’s seat adjustment switch oper ate the seat

correctly in any of the eight directions?

Go to Step 2

Refer to None of the

Passenger’s Seat

Adjustment Switch

Functions Operate

in this Section

2 Are the following connectors secure (refer to Note 3)?

• S176

• Y91 Go to Step 3

Ensure the

connectors are

secure

3 1 Remove the passenger’s seat adjustment switch from the seat,

refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the passenger’s seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-

way Seat Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the passenger’s seat adjustment s witch serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace the

passenger’s seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

4 1 Backprobe connector Y91 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 1 Backprobe connector X32 3 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 76 between

connectors

X323 pin 1 and

Y91 – X1 pin 1

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 76 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 2 and

X323 pin 1 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Backprobe connector Y91 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the front

seat-back recline

motor, refer to 5.18

Front Seat-back

Recline Motor

Assembly Go to Step 7

7 1 Backprobe connector X32 3 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the passenger’s seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 77 between

connectors

X323 pin 2 and

Y91 – X1 pin 5

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 77 between

connectors

S176 – X1 pin 4 and

X323 pin 2 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–85

Page 1A7A–85

3.5 Eight-way Seat Adjustment Switch Test

The switch is located on the outer side of the seat, attached to the inner side of the front seat outer side cover.

Test

1 Remove the eight-way seat adjustment switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Place the switch in the positions as detailed in the chart in this Section. Place the probes of the ohmmeter onto the

terminals listed and take the reading. C ompare the reading to the chart.

3 If the switch fails any part of the test, replace the switch assembly with a serviceabl e item.

4 Install the eight-way seat adjustment switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 14

Legend

Left-hand Switch

Right-hand Switch

Eight-way Seat Adjustment Switch

Switch Position Sw itch Terminals Indication if Switch is Serviceable

Position A 10 and 5 Continuity

Position B 7 and 5 Continuity

Position C 9 and 5 Continuity

Position D 8 and 5 Continuity

Position E 6 and 5 Continuity

Position F 3 and 5 Continuity

Position G 2 and 5 Continuity

Position H 4 and 5 Continuity

Switch in the neutral position 1 and either 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 Continuity

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–86

Page 1A7A–86

4 Diagnostics – Front Seat,

Memory and Rear-view Mirror,

Level 5

4.1 Prerequisites

Safety Requirements

When operating the seat as part of any Steps

in the diagnostic tables, ensure that fingers

and limbs are clear of mo ving parts.

Equipment

The following equipment is required to diagnose the seats:

• an unpowered test lamp with a current dra w of less than 3 A, and

• a digital multimeter with a minimum impe dance of 10 MΩ.

Testing Procedures

The following points must be adhered to

when performing diagnostic testing on

components:

• Take care when using testing equipment

to diagnose wiring harness connectors. It

is preferred that the technician backprobe

the connector to avoid terminal damage.

• When tests are required on connector

terminals, use the adapters in the

connector adapter kit KM–609 to prevent

damage to the terminals.

• Unless the multimeter being used has an

auto-ranging function, ensure the correct

range is selected.

• When backpro bing connectors, ensure the

test lamp ground lead is connected to an

appropriate ground point on the vehicle.

Ensure this ground point is not part of the

circuit being tested.

NOTE

When following the steps in th e diagnostic tables,

perform them in the order cited. If the required

nominal value or result is not achi eved, rectif y t he

problem before proceeding any further.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–87

Page 1A7A–87

4.2 System Self Diagnosis

The seat memory module can self-diagnose the driver's seat and the external rear-view mirrors. When a fault or failur e is

detected, the seat memory module sets a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) that represents the fault or failure. A fault or

failure that sets a DTC may leave the seat and/or external rear-view mirrors partially or totally inoperative. If the seat

memory module detects a fault, the LED located next to the mirror dip / memory store (M) button on the memory position

switch assembly, illuminates constantly during that igniti on cycle.

Current DTCs are stored by the seat memory modul e. W hen the fault conditions are n o longer met, the DTC becomes a

History DTC.

Current DTCs

When Current DTCs are detected, they are stored by the seat memory module during the current ignition cycle. Current

DTCs are set or cleared based on the condition of the seat memory module during ignition ON or continuous monitori ng

of the current ignition cycle.

NOTE

A Current DTC is identified on the T ech 2 display

by the word Current between the DTC number

and the DTC description. The word History

between the DTC number and the DTC

description indicates that the DTC displayed is a

History DTC.

Current DTCs are reset to History DTCs upo n the next diagnostic test sequence that the fault conditions are not met.

Current DTCs can be cleared (changed to history DTC) by removing the fault conditions.

Tech 2 is unable to clear current DT Cs if the fault conditions still exist; Tech 2 will displ ay Clear DTC Information

Failed.

DTCs stored in the seat memory module can onl y be displayed and/or cleared usin g the Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool.

Tech 2 communicates with the seat memory modul e serial data using the Serial Data Link Conn ector (DLC) which is

attached to the instrument panel lower trim retainer, refer to 4.3 Tech 2 Diagnostics.

History DTCs

History DTCs are set upon the clearing of a current DTC fault condition. History DTCs are maintained by the seat

memory module over multiple ignition cycles. The seat memory module can onl y clear history DTCs from its memor y by

a CLEAR DTCS serial data message from Tech 2.

Clearing DTCs

After any system fault has been rectified, use Tech 2 Clear DTC selection to erase any fault codes stored in the seat

memory module, refer to 4.4 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays for Diagnosis.

After DTCs have been cleared, verify proper

system operation and absence of any fault

codes. If Tech 2 displays Clear DTC

Information Failed after attempting to clear

DTCs, the fault condition still exists.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–88

Page 1A7A–88

4.3 Tech 2 Diagnostics

Tech 2, with the appropriate software, cables and adapters,

when connected to the Serial Data Link Connector (DLC)

can read seat and exterior rear-view mirror serial data. The

DLC is attached to the instrument panel trim retainer

beneath the steering wheel.

1 DLC

2 DLC Adapter

3 DLC Cable

4 Tech 2

For additional general information on connecting and

operating Tech 2, refer to Section 0C Tech 2.

Figure 1A7 – 15

Test Modes

Tech 2 has five test modes for diagnosing the driver's seat and the e xter nal rear-view mirrors.

Mode F0: Diagnostic Tro uble Codes

If F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes is selected, a selection list is displayed which contai ns:

• F0: Read DTC Information – Once this mode is selected, both current and history Diagnostic Trouble C odes

(DTCs) stored in the seat memory module's memory may be displayed.

• F1: Clear DTC Information – Once this mode is selected, DTCs stored in the seat memory module's memory may

be cleared.

Mode F1: Diagnostic Data Display

If F1: Diagnostic Data Display is selected, a selection list is displayed which contai ns:

• F0: Inputs and Outputs – Once this mode is selected, a list of system components and their inputs, outputs and

their status is displayed.

• F1: Memory – Once this mode is selected, a list of each memory position and the position of each of the seat axes

is displayed.

• F2: System Identification – Once this is selected, details including serial number of the seat memory module are

displayed.

Mode F2: Snapshot

In this test mode, Tech 2 captures seat memory module data before and af ter a forced manual trigger.

Mode F3: Miscellaneous Tests

In this test mode, Tech 2 displays a list of eight tests that can be utilised to diagnose the driver's seat and the external

rear-view mirrors, refer to 4.4 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays for Diagnosis for further information.

Mode F4: Additional Functions

In this test mode, Tech 2 allows the technician to reset the seat, thus clearing all memory positions,

refer to 4.4 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays for Diagnosis for further information.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–89

Page 1A7A–89

4.4 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays for

Diagnosis

A prerequisite to this diagnostic Section is for the user to be familiar with the proper use of Tech 2. T he following pages

illustrate only the major Tech 2 screen displays and provide a brief explanation of their function for diagnosing the

driver's seat and the external rear-view mirrors. If additional information is required on the oper ation of Tech 2, reference

should be made to either Section 0C Tech 2 or the Tech 2 User's Guide.

System Select Menu

With the Tech 2 connected to the DLC, and F0: Diagnostics selected from the Main Menu, the correct Model Year and

Vehicle Type must be selected for access to the System Select Menu.

Select F3: BODY.

This mode contains all functions to test, diag nose, monitor and program the vehicle's body systems including the driver's

seat and the external rear-view mirrors.

Body Application Menu

Once F3: Body has been selected from the System Select Menu, Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module can be

selected.

Select Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module.

When Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module is selected, the following two System Identification screens will

appear, which require action.

System Identification

Turn the ignition to the ON position with the engine not run ning (as requested) and press the Confirm soft key to

continue.

The System Identification Screen will then display information pertaining to the type of seat memory module fitted, serial

number, date of manufacture and other ancillary information. Press the Confirm soft key to continue to the Application

menu. The Identifier code for this seat is 201.

Always refer to the latest General Motors spare parts information for the correct part number.

Application Menu

The following functions will now be available:

• F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes

• F1: Diagnostic Data Display

• F2: Snapshot

• F3: Miscellaneous Tests

• F4: Additional Functions

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–90

Page 1A7A–90

F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes

If F0: Diagnostic Trouble Codes is selected from the Application menu, the following selection list is displayed:

F0: Read DTC Informa tion

If this mode is selected, a listing of all (if any) DTCs that have been set by the seat memory module will be displayed.

Information displayed with the DTC number/s that have been set, is a short description of what the DTC is, and whether

it is a current (fault present) or history (stored, but not necessarily on this ignition cycle) DTC.

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Codes in this Section for the full listing of driver's seat and the external rear-view mirrors

DTCs with the fault identified.

NOTE

If any DTCs are set, referenc e should be m ade t o

the relevant diagnostic tables in this Section.

F1: Clear DTC Informatio n

DTCs can be cleared in this mode by selecting F1: Clear DTC Information, pressing the ENTER button on Tech 2 and

confirming the action as instructed by Tech 2.

If DTC condition is present, Tech 2 will be unable to clear the DTC and will display Clear DTC Informati on Failed.

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

The following table sets out all the possible diagnostic troubl e codes as indicated by Tech 2.

DTC Code Location Fault

1 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Front vertical up switch stuck

2 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Front vertical down switch stuck

3 Eight-way seat adjustment s witch Rear vertic al up switch stuck

4 Eight-way seat adjustment s witch Rear vertic al down switch stuck

5 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Horizontal forward switch stuck

6 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Horizontal back switch stuck

7 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Recline up switch stuck

8 Eight-way seat adjustment switch Recline down switch stuck

9 Memory position s witch assembl y Memory button 1 stuck

10 Memory position switch assembly Memory button 2 stuck

11 Memory position switch assembly Memory button 3 stuck

12 Memory position switch assembly Mirror dip button stuck

13 Seat memory module No serial data

14 Exterior rear-view mirror circuit No exterior mirror communication

19 Seat memory module ECU malfunction

20 Seat front lift motor Front vertical position sensor fault

21 Seat rear lift motor Rear vertical position sensor fault

22 Seat fore / aft movement motor Horizontal position sensor fault

23 Seat-back recline motor Recline position sensor fault

24 Seat assembly System voltage out of range

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–91

Page 1A7A–91

F1: Diagnostic Data Display

When F1: Diagnostic Data Display is selected, three sub-headings are displayed by Tech 2.

F0: Inputs and Outputs

F0: Inputs and Outputs displays a list of data streams for various driver's seat and external rear-view mirror

components and their current status. The table in this Section lists all the data streams with a description.

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Memory 1 Button Displays the state of button 1 on the memory position switch.

If button 1 on the memory position s witch assembl y is stuck in the depressed position for

more than 8 seconds, DTC 9 will be set.

• Not Pressed / Pressed

Memory 2 Button Displays the state of button 2 on the memory position switch.

If button 2 on the memory position s witch assembl y is stuck in the depressed position for

more than 8 seconds, DTC 10 will set.

• Not Pressed / Pressed

Memory 3 Button Displays the state of button 3 on the memory position switch.

If button 3 on the memory position s witch assembl y is stuck in the depressed position for

more than 8 seconds, DTC 11 will set.

• Not Pressed / Pressed

Mirror DIP Button Displays the state of the mirror dip / memory store (M) button on the memory position

switch.

If the mirror DIP / memory store (M) button on the memory position switch assembly is

stuck in the depressed position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 12 will set.

• Not Pressed / Pressed

Front Vertical Switch Displays the state of the front lift switch on the seat adjustment switch.

If the front vertical switch is stuck in the up position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 1 will set.

If the front vertical switch is stuck in the down position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 2 will

set.

• Inactive / Up / Down

Rear Vertical Switch Displays the state of the rear lift switch on the seat adjustment switch.

If the rear vertical switch is stuck in the up position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 3 will set.

If the front vertical switch is stuck in the down position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 4 will

set.

• Inactive / Up / Down

Horizontal Switch Displays the state of the horizontal switch on the seat adjustment switch.

If the horizontal switch is stuck in the forward position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 5 will

set.

If the horizontal switch is stuck in the aft position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 6 will set.

• Inactive / Forward / Back

Recline Switch Displays the state of the recline switch on the seat adjustment switch.

If the recline switch is stuck in the forward position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 7 will set.

If the recline switch is stuck in the aft position for more than 8 seconds, DTC 8 will set.

• Inactive / Forward / Back

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–92

Page 1A7A–92

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Front Vertical Position

Sensor Displays if the front lift motor position sensor is connected.

• Connected / Not Connected

Front Vertical Position

Sensor Displays the current position of the front lift motor position sensor as a value in Steps. The

Steps will range from 0 to 65535.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Front Vertical Position

Maximum Limit Displays the maximum limit of travel up in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be high but never reach 65535 Steps. If the value d isplayed is 65535, the

seat has not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Front Vertical Position

Minimum Limit Displays the minimum limit of travel down in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be low but never reach 0 Steps. If the value displayed is 0, the seat has

not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Rear Vertical Position

Sensor Displays if the rear lift motor position sensor is connected.

• Connected / Not Connected

Rear Vertical Position

Sensor Displays the current position of the rear lift motor position sensor as a val ue in Steps. The

Steps will range from 0 to 65535.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Rear Vertical Position

Maximum Limit Displays the maximum limit of travel up in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be high but never reach 65535 Steps. If the value d isplayed is 65535, the

seat has not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Rear Vertical Position

Minimum Limit Displays the minimum limit of travel down in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be low but never reach 0 Steps. If the value displayed is 0, the seat has

not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Horizontal Position Sensor Displays if the fore/aft movement motor position sensor is c onnected.

• Connected / Not Connected

Horizontal Position Sensor Displays the current position of the fore/aft movement motor position sensor as a value in

Steps. The Steps will range from 0 to 65535.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Horizontal Position

Maximum Limit Displays the maximum limit of travel forward in Steps. T his value depends on the calibration

of the seat.

This value should be high but never reach 65535 Steps. If the value d isplayed is 65535, the

seat has not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–93

Page 1A7A–93

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Horizontal Position

Minimum Limit Displays the minimum limit of travel aft in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be low but never reach 0 Steps. If the value displayed is 0, the seat has

not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Recline Position Sensor Displays if the seat-back recline motor positi on sensor is connected.

• Connected / Not Connected

Recline Position Sensor Displays the current position of the seat-back recline motor position sensor as a value in

Steps. The Steps will range from 0 to 65535.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Recline Position Maximum

Limit Displays the maximum limit of travel forward in Steps. T his value depends on the calibration

of the seat.

This value should be high but never reach 65535 Steps. If the value d isplayed is 65535, the

seat has not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Recline Position Minimum

Limit Displays the minimum limit of travel aft in Steps. This value depends on the calibration of

the seat.

This value should be low but never reach 0 Steps. If the value displayed is 0, the seat has

not been calibrated. Refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly to calibrate the seat.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Button Pack

Communication Displays whether there is serial data communicati on with the mirror control switch,

right-hand or left-hand rear-view mirrors. If there is communication with at least one of these

components, Tech 2 will displa y Okay. If there is no communications with all of the

components, Tech 2 will displa y Not Okay.

If there are no serial data communications, a DTC 14 will set.

• Okay / Not Okay

Right Exterior Mirror

Communication Displays if Tech 2 can communic ate with the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror.

If there is not serial data communications with the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror, a

DTC 14 will set.

• Okay / Not Okay

Left Exterior Mirror

Communication Displays if Tech 2 can communic ate with the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror.

If there is not serial data communications with the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror, a DTC

14 will set.

• Okay / Not Okay

Right Exterior Mirror Switch Displays the status of the mirror control switch, when the rocker switch is selected to right.

• Up / Down / Left / Right / Inactive

Left Exterior Mirror Switch Displays the status of the mirror control switch, when the rocker switch is selected to left.

• Up / Down / Left / Right / Inactive

Memory Recall Position In

Use Displays the status of the current memory recall of the seat assembly.

• Memory 1 / Memory 2 / Memory 3 / Priority 1 / Priority 2 / No Active Memory

Current Priority Displays what is the current priority that has been set when the vehicle is unlocked with

either priority key 1 or 2.

• Priority 1 / Priority 2 / No Active Memory

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–94

Page 1A7A–94

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Able To Recall Displays if the seat assembly has the ability to recall a memory position.

• Yes / No

Start Wait Active Only when there has been a cold-start reset will Tech 2 display No. A cold-start reset will

occur when module detects too much electro m agnetic interference (EMI) in the system. If

the Start Wait Active displays No, the system will still be operational.

• Yes / No

Able To Move When the seat is requested to move, the seat memory module monitors the amou nt of

Steps that a position sensor has taken during that movement. This inability to move at all or

quickly enough may be due to a physical restriction in that movement, or the battery not

having enough charge to power the particular motor adequately.

• Yes / No

Ignition Switch Displays the status of the ignition switch.

• On / Off / Accessory

Demist Request Displays the status of the rear demist system. This will be Yes when the rear demist button

is pressed.

• Yes / No

Reverse Gear Displays if the vehicle is in reverse gear.

• Inactive / Active

PRNDL Position Displays the position of the transmission selector.

• P / R / N / D / 3 / 2 / 1

F1: Memory

F1: MEMORY displays all the five memory settings availabl e. Within each of the memory settings the position of the seat

is displayed (in Steps) and if the mirror dip function is enabled.

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Memory 1 Mirror Dip Status Displays if the mirror dip function is enabled for Memory 1.

• Enabled / Disabled

Memory 1 Front Vertical

Position Displays the seat front vertical position (in Steps) that has been store d in Memory 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Memory 1 Rear Vertical

Position Displays the seat rear vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Memory 1 Horizontal

Position Displays the seat horizontal position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Memory 1 Recline Position Displays the seat-back recline position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Memory 2 Mirror Dip Status Displays if the mirror dip function is enabled for Memory 2.

• Enabled / Disabled

Memory 2 Front Vertical

Position Displays the seat front vertical position (in Steps) that has been store d in Memory 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Memory 2 Rear Vertical

Position Displays the seat rear vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–95

Page 1A7A–95

Data Stream /

Screen Display Description

Memory 2 Horizontal

Position Displays the seat horizontal position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Memory 2 Recline Position Displays the seat-back recline position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Memory 3 Mirror Dip Status Displays if the mirror dip function is enabled for Memory 3.

• Enabled / Disabled

Memory 3 Front Vertical

Position Displays the seat front vertical position (in Steps) that has been store d in Memory 3.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Memory 3 Rear Vertical

Position Displays the seat rear vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 3.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Memory 3 Horizontal

Position Displays the seat horizontal position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 3.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Memory 3 Recline Position Displays the seat-back recline position (in Steps) that has been stored in Memory 3.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Priority 1 Mirror Dip Status Displays if the mirror dip function is enabled for Priority 1.

• Enabled / Disabled

Priority 1 Front Vertical

Position Displays the seat front vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in P riority 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Priority 1 Rear Vertical

Position Displays the seat rear vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Priority 1 Horizontal

Position Displays the seat horizontal position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Priority 1 Recline Position Displays the seat-back recline position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 1.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

Priority 2 Mirror Dip Status Displays if the mirror dip function is enabled for Priority 2.

• Enabled / Disabled

Priority 2 Front Vertical

Position Displays the seat front vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in P riority 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Priority 2 Rear Vertical

Position Displays the seat rear vertical position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 31 488 – 33536)

Priority 2 Horizontal

Position Displays the seat horizontal position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 20 480 – 40960)

Priority 2 Recline Position Displays the seat-back recline position (in Steps) that has been stored in Priority 2.

• 0 – 65535 Steps (typical 16 384 – 45056)

F2: System Identification

F2: System Identification displays the specifications of the seat memory module, refer to System Identification with i n

this Section.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–96

Page 1A7A–96

F2: Snapshot

In this mode, Tech 2 captures seat memory module data b efore and after a forced manual trigger.

F3: Miscellaneous Tests

In this mode, a list of tests are displayed that can be used to control certain functions of the driver's seat and the exterior

rear-view mirrors.

F0: Chime

When this test is selected, menu keys are availabl e. To activate the chime function of the seat memory module, press

the On key. The chime will then sound continuously. To turn off the chime, press the Off key. To return to

F3: Miscellaneous Tests menu, press the Quit key.

In this test, the input and output data is also displayed, refer to F0: Inputs and Outputs in this Section.

F1: LED

When this test is selected, menu keys are availabl e. To activate the LED function of the seat memory module, press the

Flash key. The LED will flash. To return to F3: Miscellaneous Tests menu, press the Quit key.

In this test, the input and output data is also displayed, refer to F0: Inputs and Outputs in this Section.

F2: Right Exterior Mirror

When this test is selected, the arrow keys on Tech 2 can be used to drive the right-hand exterior mirror in all four

directions. During this test the data stream for the right-hand exterior mirror will be displayed. The data stream will

change from off to the direction pressed.

F3: Left Exterior Mirror

When this test is selected, the arrow keys on Tech 2 can be used to drive the left-hand exterior mirror in all four

directions. During this test the data stream for the left-hand exterior mirror will be displayed. The data stream will change

from off to the direction pressed.

F4: Front Vertical Motor

When this test is selected, menu keys are available. To drive the front lift motor up, press the Up key and alternatively to

move the front lift motor down, press the Down key.

F5: Rear Vertical Mirror

When this test is selected, menu keys are available. To drive the rear lift motor up, press the Up key and alternatively to

move the rear lift motor down, press the Down key.

F6: Horizontal Motor

When this test is selected, menu keys are availabl e. To drive the seat fore/aft movement motor forward, press the

Forward key and alternatively to move the seat fore/aft movement motor aft, press the Back key.

F7: Recline Motor

When this test is selected, menu keys are availabl e. To drive the seat-back recline motor for ward, press the Forward key

and alternatively to move the seat-back recline motor aft, press the Back key.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–97

Page 1A7A–97

F4: Additional Functions

F0: Module Reset

This function clears all the preset memories i ncluding any priority key that the seat memory module has stored.

When this function is selected, menu keys are available. Tech 2 will prompt with the message Do you Really Want To

Reset. To reset the module, press the Yes key. If the technician does not want to reset the module, press the No key

and to return the F4: Additional Functions menu.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–98

Page 1A7A–98

4.5 Preliminary System Diagnosis

Prior to starting any diagnosis, the technician should be familiar with the driver's seat and the external rear-view mirror

components and operation. For a descri ptio n of the components and the system operation,

refer to 1 General Information.

When investigating any complaint of a problem or malfunction, always begin diagnos is wit h a circu it check, refer to

4.8 Electrical Diagnosis – Memor y Seat, Ini tial Check for a seat fault, or

4.10 Electrical Diagnosis – Rear-view Mirrors, Initial Check for an exterior rear-view mirror fault. If the complaint is of a

mechanical nature, refer to 4.7 Mechanical Diag nosis.

The diagnostic circuit check ensures that the driver's seat and the external rear-view mirrors are communicating on the

serial data line as well as assi sting to identify the problem and to ascertai n the appropriate diagnostic table in this

Section.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–99

Page 1A7A–99

4.6 Diagnostic Tables

Introduction

The following diagnostic tables are designed to provide fast and efficient fault location and remedy. The diagnostic tables

include a chart, pertinent information, circuit diagrams, and where necessary, the steps are explained by the

corresponding numbered paragraphs.

When performing wiring checks as directed to by the diagnostic tables, rather than probe pins and connectors with

incorrect sized multimeter connectio ns, use the ad apters contained in connector test adapter kit Tool No. KM-609 and

test lead set Tool No. KM609-20. This will prevent any possibility of spreading or damaging wiring harness pins and

causing a system intermittent failure.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–100

Page 1A7A–100

4.7 Mechanical Diagnosis

Lumbar Support Inoperative

Introduction

This test is used to aid in diagnosing the lumbar support assembly.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the lumbar support knob is properly engaging the lumbar support adjuster. Check the knob for cracks and

worn splines.

2 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is damage d or worn and if the retaining springs are serviceable and

securely attached to the seat-back frame assembly.

3 Checks if the lumbar support assembly is serviceable and if the lumber support assembly strap is operating

correctly within the guide rails.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Remove the lumbar support knob, refer to 5.9 Lumbar Su pport Knob

Assembly.

Is the lumbar support adjust knob serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the knob,

refer to 5.9 Lumbar

Support Knob

Assembly

2 1 Remove the seat-back cover.

2 Inspect the lumbar support retainers and spri ngs.

Are the lumbar support retaining spri ngs serviceable and securely

attached to the seat-back frame assembly? Go to Step 3

Replace or reattach

the retaining

springs, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

3 1 Visually inspect the lumbar support assembly. Check for broken

or worn parts.

2 Check the strap running across the lumber s upport assembly is

serviceable and running freely within the guide rails.

NOTE

You may need to attach the lumber support knob to

actuate the strap.

Is the lumbar support assembly serviceabl e? System serviceable

Replace lumbar

support assembly or

resecure lumbar

support assembly

strap ensuring strap

is not binding with

guide rails, refer to

5.11 Front

Seat-back Frame

Assembly

When all diagno sis and repairs are completed, ch eck the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–101

Page 1A7A–101

4.8 Electrical Diagnosis – Memory Seat

Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD

Figure 1A7A – 16

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–102

Page 1A7A–102

Figure 1A7A – 17

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–103

Page 1A7A–103

Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD

Figure 1A7A – 18

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–104

Page 1A7A–104

Figure 1A7A – 19

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–105

Page 1A7A–105

Connector Chart – Memory Seat

Figure 1A7A – 20

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–106

Page 1A7A–106

Initial Check

Introduction

The driver's seat and exterior rear-view mirrors can be diagnosed using T ech 2. The diagnostic table tests each function

of the seat for correct operation.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the fault is isolated to the driver’s seat.

2 If Tech 2 cannot access the System Identification menu there is a problem with the power, serial data

communications or ground cir cuits to the memory module.

3 Checks if there are any current DTCs.

4-11 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable. Also checks if the associated motor circuits are serviceable.

12 Using Tech 2, checks if the memory position s witch assembly is operational.

13 Checks if the seat front lift motor hall-effect sensor is connected.

14 Checks if the seat front lift motor hall-effect sensor (in Steps) has an acceptable maximum, minimum value and

current seat position is within that rang e.

15 Checks if the seat rear lift motor hall-effect sensor is connected.

16 Checks if the seat rear lift motor hall-effect sensor (in Steps) has an acce ptable maximum, minimum val ue and

current seat position is within that rang e.

17 Checks if the seat horizontal motor hall-effect sensor is connected.

18 Checks if the seat horizontal motor hall-effect sensor (in Steps) has an acceptable maximum, minimum value and

current seat position is within that rang e.

19 Checks if the seat recline motor hall-effect sensor is connected.

20 Checks if the seat recline mot or hal l-effect sensor (in Steps) has an acceptable ma ximum, minimum value and

current seat position is within that rang e.

21 Checks if the seat memory module stores a different seat position for each of the three memory buttons. Checks if

when each of the memory buttons are pressed, the seat moves to the stored position and Tech 2 displays the

correct information.

22 Checks if the seat recalls a priority key memory position.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–107

Page 1A7A–107

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Are all of the passenger’s seat adjustment switch functions

inoperative? Refer to Neither

Seat Adjustment

Switch Functions

Operate in 3.3

Electrical Diagnosis

– Eight-way Seat,

Non-memory, RHD Go to Step 2

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module.

3 Turn the ignition on when prompted.

Is the Seat and Exterior Mirror Module System Identification

specifications displayed? Go to Step 3

Refer to

No Serial Data

Communications to

the Seat Memory

Module

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Are there any DTCs set?

Refer to the relevant

DTC diagnostic

table in this Section Go to Step 4

4 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module / Diagnostic

Data Display / Inputs and Outputs.

3 Scroll to Front Vertical Switch.

4 While monitoring Tech 2, operate the seat a djustme nt switch to

raise and lower the front of the seat.

Does Tech 2 display the fol lowing:

• Inactive when the switch is in the neutral position.

• Up when the switch is in the up positio n.

• Down when the switch is in the down positio n. Go to Step 5

Refer to Seat

Adjustment Switch

Inoperative – RHD

or Seat Adjustment

Switch Inoperative –

LHD

5 During the test in Step 4, does the front of the seat move in the

following directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the front of the seat

does not move.

• When the switch is in the up position, the front of the seat raises.

• When the switch is in the down position, the front of the seat

lowers. NOTE

Ensure that the seat is not at its maximum limit of travel

before performing this test. Go to Step 6

Seat Front Lift Motor

Inoperative – RHD

or Seat Front Lift

Motor Inoperative –

LHD

6 1 On Tech 2 select:

Rear Seat Vertical Switch.

2 While monitoring Tech 2, operate the seat a djustme nt switch to

raise and lower the rear of the seat.

Does Tech 2 display the fol lowing:

• Inactive when the switch is in the neutral position.

• Up when the switch is in the up positio n.

• Down when the switch is in the down positio n. Go to Step 7

Refer to Seat

Adjustment Switch

Inoperative – RHD

or Seat Adjustment

Switch Inoperative –

LHD

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–108

Page 1A7A–108

Step Action Yes No

7 During the test in Step 6, does the rear of the seat move in the

following directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the rear of the seat

does not move.

• When the switch is in the up position, the rear of the seat raises.

• When the switch is in the down position, the rear of the seat

lowers. NOTE

Ensure that the seat is not at its maximum limit of travel

before performing this test. Go to Step 8 Seat Rear Lift Motor

Inoperative

8 1 On Tech 2 select:

Horizontal Switch.

2 While monitoring Tech 2, operate the seat a djustme nt switch to

move the seat forward and aft.

Does Tech 2 display the fol lowing:

• Inactive when the switch is in the neutral position.

• Forward when the switch is in the forward position.

• Back when the switch is in the aft position. Go to Step 9

Refer to Seat

Adjustment Switch

Inoperative – RHD

or Seat Adjustment

Switch Inoperative –

LHD

9 During the test in Step 8, does the seat move in the following

directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the seat does not

move.

• When the switch is in the forward position, the seat moves

forward.

• When the switch is in the aft position, the seat moves aft.

NOTE

Ensure that the seat is not at its maximum limit of travel

before performing this test. Go to Step 10

Refer to Seat

Fore/Aft Movement

Motor Inoperative

10 1 On Tech 2 select:

Recline Switch.

2 While monitoring Tech 2, operate the seat a djustme nt switch to

move the seat-back forward and aft.

Does Tech 2 display the fol lowing:

• Inactive when the switch is in the neutral position.

• Forward when the switch is in the forward position.

• Back when the switch is in the aft position. Go to Step 11

Refer to Seat

Adjustment Switch

Inoperative – RHD

or Seat Adjustment

Switch Inoperative –

LHD

11 During the test in Step 10, does the seat-back move in the following

directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the seat-back does

not move.

• When the switch is in the forward position, th e seat-back moves

forward.

• When the switch is in the aft position, the seat-back moves aft.

NOTE

Ensure that the seat is not at its maximum limit of travel

before performing this test. Go to Step 12

Refer to Seat

Fore/Aft Movement

Motor Inoperative

12 1 On Tech 2 select:

Memory Button 1.

2 While monitoring Tech 2, press the following buttons:

• Memory button 1

• Memory button 2

• Memory button 3

• Mirror dip / memory button

Does Tech 2 display Active next to the corresponding button? Go to Step 13

Refer to Memory

Position Switch

Inoperative – RHD

or Memory Position

Switch Inoperative –

LHD

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–109

Page 1A7A–109

Step Action Yes No

13 On Tech 2 select:

Front Vertical Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 display the hal l-effect sensor is Connected? Go to Step 14

Seat Front Lift Motor

Hall-effect Sensor

Check

14 1 On Tech 2 select:

Front Vertical Position Maximum Limit.

2 Check the following values displayed on Tech 2:

• Front Vertical Maximum Position Limit. This should be

less than 65535 Steps.

• Front Vertical Minimum Position Limit. This should be

more than 0 Steps.

• Front Vertical Position Sensor. This value should be

between the minimum and maximum values. Go to Step 15

Disconnect battery

power from the seat

and perform the

calibration

procedure, refer to

5.3 Front Seat

Assembly

15 On Tech 2 select:

Rear Vertical Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 display the hal l-effect sensor is Connected? Go to Step 16

Refer to Seat Rear

Lift Motor Hall-effect

Sensor Check

16 1 On Tech 2 select:

Rear Vertical Position Maximum Limit.

2 Check the following values displayed on Tech 2:

• Rear Vertical Maximum Position Limit. This should be

less than 65535 Steps.

• Rear Vertical Minimum Position Limit. This should be

more than 0 Steps.

• Rear Vertical Position Sensor. This value should be

between the minimum and maximum values. Go to Step 17

Disconnect battery

power from the seat

and perform the

calibration

procedure, refer to

5.3 Front Seat

Assembly

17 On Tech 2 select:

Horizontal Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 show the hall-effect sensor is Connected? Go to Step 18

Refer to Seat

Fore/Aft Movement

Motor Hall-effect

Sensor Check

18 1 On Tech 2 select:

Horizontal Position Maximum Limit.

2 Check the following values displayed on Tech 2:

• Horizontal Maximum Position Limit. This should be less

than 65535 Steps.

• Horizontal Minimum Position Limit. This should be more

than 0 Steps.

• Horizontal Position Sensor. This value should be

between the minimum and maximum values. Go to Step 19

Disconnect battery

power from the seat

and perform the

calibration

procedure, refer to

5.3 Front Seat

Assembly

19 On Tech 2 select:

Recline Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 show the hall-effect sensor is Connected? Go to Step 20

Refer to Seat-back

Recline Motor

Inoperative

20 1 On Tech 2 select:

Recline Position Maximum Limit.

2 Check the following values displayed on Tech 2:

• Recline Maximum Position Limit. This should be less

than 65535 Steps.

• Recline Minimum Position Limit. This should be more

than 0 Steps.

• Recline Position Sensor. This value should be between

the minimum and maximum valu es. Go to Step 21

Disconnect battery

power from the seat

and perform the

calibration

procedure, refer to

5.3 Front Seat

Assembly

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–110

Page 1A7A–110

Step Action Yes No

21 1 Store a new memory position in each of the available positions

(Memory Button 1, 2 and 3), refer to 1 General Information for

instructions (or the Owner Manual).

NOTE

When a seat position is stored into the relevant memory

position, the seat will chime. For each of the memory

positions, confirm the chime.

2 After the last position has been stored in memory, move the seat

out of that position.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Memory Recall Position. Tech 2 should display No Active

Memory.

4 While monitoring Tech 2, press memor y but t on 1. The seat will

move to the stored position and Tech 2 will display Memory

Button 1 while the button is pressed. When the seat comes to a

stop and the button is released, does Tech 2 display Memory

Button 1.

5 While monitoring Tech 2, press memor y but t on 2. The seat will

move to the stored position and Tech 2 will display Memory

Button 2. When the seat comes to a stop and the button is

released, does Tech 2 display Memory Button 2.

6 While monitoring Tech 2, press memor y but t on 3. The seat will

move to the stored position and Tech 2 will display Memory

Button 3. When the seat comes to a stop, does Tech 2 display

Memory Button 3.

Does Tech 2 display the relevant memory positions as described in

this test? Go to Step 22

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

22 NOTE

To perform this test, both keys supplied with the vehicle

are needed.

1 On Tech 2 select:

Current Priority and ensure that No Active Memory is

displayed.

2 Disconnect Tech 2 from the vehicle.

3 Using the seat adjustment switch, move the seat to a new

position and lock the car with the Remote Control from Ke y 1.

4 Unlock the vehicle with the Remote Control from Key 1.

5 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

6 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module / Diagnostic

Data Display / Inputs and Outputs and scroll to Current

Priority.

Does Tech 2 display e ither Priority 1 or Priority 2? System serviceable Refer to Priority Key

Feature Inoperative

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs an d check the system for correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–111

Page 1A7A–111

No Serial Data Communications to the Seat Memory Module

Introduction

For Tech 2 to communicate with the seat memory module, the following must be satisfied:

• There must be no faults in the serial data bus. If there is a fault, it can be caused at any where on the bus and

consist of a short to ground or battery, or an open circuit.

• There must be power and ground circuit to the seat memory module.

If either of these problems exist, Tech 2 will not communicate with either the seat memory module or the entire serial

data bus, depending on where the fault is.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if Tech 2 is able to communicate with other modules in the vehicle. Isolates whether the problem is with the

seat memory module and its circuits or with the serial data bus.

2 Checks if circuit breaker F2 is serviceable.

3 Checks if there is battery supply to the seat memory module at connector A21 – X1.

4 Circuit 650 provides a ground circuit for the seat memory module. Checks if there is an open circuit in circuit 650.

5 Circuit 151 provides a ground circuit for the seat memory module. Checks if there is an open circuit in circuit 151.

6 Checks if there is continuity in the serial data line between the seat memory module and the BCM.

7 Checks if fusible link F105 is serviceable.

8 Checks for battery voltage at connector X200 pin 19. Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 540 between

connectors X200 and A21–X1 or between X200 and circuit breaker F2.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–112

Page 1A7A–112

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn the ignition to the ON position with the engine not running.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / DTC Check / DTC Check and press the Confirm soft

key when instructed. If No Data is displayed next to a control

module, there is no communication b etween Tech 2 and that

particular control module.

Does Tech 2 communicate with the BCM and the PCM? Go to Step 2 Refer to 12J Body

Control Module

2 1 Disconnect Tech 2 from the DLC.

2 Check the circuit breaker F2, located on the passenger

compartment fuse and relay panel.

Is the circuit breaker F2 serviceable?

Go to Step 3

Allow the circuit

breaker to reset

(refer to Note 3).

If the circuit breaker

trips again, repair or

replace circuit 540

(refer to Note 2)

3 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7

4 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X1 from the seat memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector A21 – X1 pin 11 and a known ground (refer to

Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2)

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connector A21 – X1 pin 10 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Disconnect connectors A21 – X3 from the seat memory module

and A15 – X2 from the BCM.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X3 pin 20 and A15 – X2 pin 9 (refer to

Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

circuit 1061 (refer to

Note 2)

7 Check the fusible link F105, located on the engine compartment fuse

and relay panel assemb ly.

Is the fusible link F105 serviceable?

Go to Step 8

Replace the fusible

link F105.

If the fusible link

blows again, repair

or replace circuits 1,

342 and 540 (refer

to Note 1)

8 Backprobe connector X200 pin 19 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

connectors X200

and A21 – X1 (refer

to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 540 between

the circuit breaker

F2 and connector

X200 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–113

Page 1A7A–113

Seat Adjustment Switch Inoperative – RHD

Introduction

The seat adjustment switch provides manual control for the driver's seat. It is connected by a harness to the seat

memory module.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector A21 – X1 pin 12. Isolates if the seat memory module is fau lty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the seat adjustment switch. Isolates if circuit 1674 is faulty.

4 Checks the seat adjustment switch for serviceability. Isolates if the seat adjustment switch is faulty.

5 Checks the harness connecting the seat adjustment switch to the seat memory module for a short to ground.

6 Checks the harness connecting the seat adjustment switch to the seat memory module for an open circuit. Isolates

whether the harness or the seat memory module is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–114

Page 1A7A–114

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 12 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 1674 (refer to

Note 2)

4 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between the

following connectors and a known ground (refer to Note 1):

• S51 – X1 pin 10

• S51 – X1 pin 7

• S51 – X1 pin 9

• S51 – X1 pin 8

• S51 – X1 pin 2

• S51 – X1 pin 4

• S51 – X1 pin 6

• S51 – X1 pin 3

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in any of the above tests?

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that displays

continuity on the

multimeter (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 6

6 1 Disconnect harness connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory

module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the following connectors (refer to Note 1):

• S51 – X1 pin 10 and A21 – X3 pin 5

• S51 – X1 pin 7 and A21 – X3 pin 7

• S51 – X1 pin 9 and A21 – X3 pin 16

• S51 – X1 pin 8 and A21 – X3 pin 13

• S51 – X1 pin 2 and A21 – X3 pin 14

• S51 – X1 pin 4 and A21 – X3 pin 2

• S51 – X1 pin 6 and A21 – X3 pin 4

• S51 – X1 pin 3 and A21 – X3 pin 3

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in all of the above tests?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that does not

display continuity on

the multimeter (refer

to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–115

Page 1A7A–115

Seat Adjustment Switch Inoperative – LHD

Introduction

The seat adjustment switch provides manual control for the driver's seat. It is connected by a harness to the seat

memory module.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power at connector A21 – X1 pin 12. Isolates if the seat memory module is fau lty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the seat adjustment switch. Isolates if circuit 1674 is faulty.

4 Checks the seat adjustment switch for serviceability. Isolates if the seat adjustment switch is faulty.

5 Checks the harness connecting the seat adjustment switch to the seat memory module for a short to ground.

6 Checks the harness connecting the seat adjustment switch to the seat memory module for an open circuit. Isolates

whether the harness or the seat memory module is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–116

Page 1A7A–116

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 12 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 1674 (refer to

Note 2)

4 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between the

following connectors and a known ground (refer to Note 1):

• S51 – X1 pin 7

• S51 – X1 pin 10

• S51 – X1 pin 8

• S51 – X1 pin 9

• S51 – X1 pin 2

• S51 – X1 pin 4

• S51 – X1 pin 6

• S51 – X1 pin 3

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in any of the above tests?

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that displays

continuity on the

multimeter (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 6

6 1 Disconnect harness connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory

module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the following connectors (refer to Note 1):

• S51 – X1 pin 7 and A21 – X3 pin 5

• S51 – X1 pin 10 and A21 – X3 pin 7

• S51 – X1 pin 8 and A21 – X3 pin 16

• S51 – X1 pin 9 and A21 – X3 pin 13

• S51 – X1 pin 2 and A21 – X3 pin 14

• S51 – X1 pin 4 and A21 – X3 pin 2

• S51 – X1 pin 6 and A21 – X3 pin 4

• S51 – X1 pin 3 and A21 – X3 pin 3

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in all of the above tests?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that does not

display continuity on

the multimeter (refer

to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–117

Page 1A7A–117

Seat Front Lift Motor Inoperative – RHD

Introduction

The seat front lift motor is controlled by the seat memory module which provides power and ground for the motor. The

polarity of the motor is alternated to change the direction of the motor.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to raise the front of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to raise the front of the seat. Isolates if circuit 286 is faulty.

4 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to lower the front of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

5 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat. Isolates whether circuit 287 or the seat

motor is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 286 (refer to

Note 2)

4 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 8 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

5 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 287 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–118

Page 1A7A–118

Seat Front Lift Motor Inoperative – LHD

Introduction

The seat front lift motor is controlled by the seat memory module which provides power and ground for the motor. The

polarity of the motor is alternated to change the direction of the motor.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to raise the front of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to raise the front of the seat. Isolates if circuit 286 is faulty.

4 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to lower the front of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

5 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to lower the front of the seat. Isolates whether circuit 287 or the seat

motor is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 8 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 286 (refer to

Note 2)

4 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

5 1 Backprobe connector Y67 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the front of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

front lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 287 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–119

Page 1A7A–119

Seat Rear Lift Motor Inoperative

Introduction

The seat rear lift motor is controlled by the seat memory module which provides power and ground for the motor. The

polarity of the motor is alternated to change the direction of the motor.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to raise the rear of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to raise the rear of the seat. Isolates if circuit 282 is faulty.

4 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to lower the rear of the seat. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

5 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to lower the rear of the seat. Isolates whether circuit 283 or the seat

motor is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 4 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 282 (refer to

Note 2)

4 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

5 1 Backprobe connector Y69 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the rear of the seat.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

rear lift motor, refer

to 5.16 Front Seat

Lift Motor

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 283 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–120

Page 1A7A–120

Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Inoperative

Introduction

The seat fore/aft movement motor is controlled by the seat memory module which provides power and ground for the

motor. The polarity of the motor is alternated to change the direction of the motor.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to move the seat forward. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to move the seat forward. Isolates if circuit 285 is faulty.

4 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to move the seat aft. Isolates if the seat memory

module is faulty.

5 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to move the seat aft. Isolates whether circuit 284 or the seat motor is

faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 285 (refer to

Note 2)

4 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X1 pin 9 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

5 1 Backprobe connector Y64 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

fore/aft movement

motor, refer to 5.17

Front Seat Fore/Aft

Movement Motor

Assembly

Repair or replace

circuit 284 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–121

Page 1A7A–121

Seat-back Recline Motor Inoperative

Introduction

The seat-back recline motor is controll ed by the seat memory module which provides power and ground for the motor.

The polarity of the motor is alternated to change the direction of the motor.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to move the seat-back forward. Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to move the seat-back forward. Isolates if circuit 276 is faulty.

4 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 276 between connectors A21 – X2 pin 6 and X314 pin 3 or between

connectors X314 pin 3 and Y74 – X1 pin 1.

5 Checks if there is battery power from the seat memory module to move the seat-back aft . Isolates if the seat

memory module is faulty.

6 Checks if there is battery power to the motor to move the seat-back aft. Isolates whether circuit 277 or the seat

motor is faulty.

7 Isolates whether there is a fault in circuit 277 between connectors A21 – X2 pin 11 an d X314 pin 4 or between

connectors X314 pin 4 and Y74 – X1 pin 5.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–122

Page 1A7A–122

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X2 pin 6 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

3 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4

4 1 Backprobe connector X314 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back

forward.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

X314 pin 3 and

Y74 – X1 pin 1

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 276 between

connectors

A21 – X2 pin 6 and

X314 pin 3 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Backprobe connector A21 – X2 pin 11 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

6 1 Backprobe connector Y74 – X1 pin 5 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the

seat-back recline

motor, refer to 5.18

Front Seat-back

Recline Motor

Assembly Go to Step 7

7 1 Backprobe connector X314 pin 4 with a test lamp (refer to Note

1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back aft.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

X314 pin 4 and

Y74 – X1 pin 5

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 277 between

connectors

A21 – X2 pin 11 and

X314 pin 4 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–123

Page 1A7A–123

Memory Position Switch Inoperative – RHD

Introduction

The memory position switch is connected to the seat memory module by a harness.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the memory position switch for serviceability. Isolates if the switch is faulty.

3 Checks the harness connecting the memory position switch to the seat memory module for a short to ground.

4 Checks the harness connecting the memory position switch to the seat memory module for an open circuit. Isolates

whether the harness or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Remove the memory position switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 3

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

3 1 Disconnect connectors A21 – X3 and A21 – X4 from the seat

memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the following connectors and a known ground (refer to Note 1):

• A21 – X3 pin 8

• A21 – X3 pin 9

• A21 – X3 pin 18

• A21 – X3 pin 19

• A21 – X4 pin 3

• A21 – X4 pin 13

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in any of the above tests?

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that displays

continuity on the

multimeter (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between the

following connectors (refer to Note 1):

• A21 – X3 pin 8 and S52 – X1 pin 2

• A21 – X3 pin 9 and S52 – X1 pin 1

• A21 – X3 pin 18 and S52 – X1 pin 4

• A21 – X3 pin 19 and S52 – X1 pin 3

• A21 – X4 pin 3 and S52 – X1 pin 6

• A21 – X4 pin 13 and S52 – X1 pin 5

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in all of the above tests?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that does not

display continuity on

the multimeter (refer

to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–124

Page 1A7A–124

Memory Position Switch Inoperative – LHD

Introduction

The memory position switch is connected to the seat memory module by a harness.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the memory position switch for serviceability. Isolates if the switch is faulty.

3 Checks the harness connecting the memory position switch to the seat memory module for a short to ground.

4 Checks the harness connecting the memory position switch to the seat memory module for an open circuit. Isolates

whether the harness or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Remove the memory position switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 3

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

3 1 Disconnect connectors A21 – X3 and A21 – X4 from the seat

memory module

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the following connectors and a known ground (refer to Note 1):

• A21 – X3 pin 8

• A21 – X3 pin 9

• A21 – X3 pin 18

• A21 – X3 pin 19

• A21 – X4 pin 3

• A21 – X4 pin 13

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in any of the above tests?

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that displays

continuity on the

multimeter (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between the

following connectors (refer to Note 1):

• A21 – X3 pin 8 and S52 – X1 pin 5

• A21 – X3 pin 9 and S52 – X1 pin 6

• A21 – X3 pin 18 and S52 – X1 pin 3

• A21 – X3 pin 19 and S52 – X1 pin 4

• A21 – X4 pin 3 and S52 – X1 pin 1

• A21 – X4 pin 13 and S52 – X1 pin 2

Does the multimeter indicate continuity in all of the above tests?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

the relevant circuit

that does not

display continuity on

the multimeter (refer

to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–125

Page 1A7A–125

Seat Front Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check

Introduction

The seat front lift motor hall-effect sensor provides a pulse signal to the seat memory module. This signal represents the

vertical position of the front of the seat.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the hall-effect sensor connector is secure.

3 Checks the AC output from the hall-effect sensor during operation.

4 Checks if the ground circuit is serviceable.

5-6 Checks if there is continuity between connectors Y67 – X1 and A21 – X4. Isolates if the hall-effect sensor is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

5 The AC voltage displayed will depend on the battery voltage supplied to the seat. At 16 V DC supply, the AC

voltage produced by the hall-effect sensor will be appro ximately 15 V. At 9 V DC supply, the AC voltage produced

by the hall-effect sensor will be approximatel y 8 V.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Ensure connector Y67 – X1 is secure.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Module / Diagnostic Data

Display / Inputs and Outputs.

4 Scroll to Front Vertical Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 show the position sensor as Connected? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across

connector Y67 – X1 pins 2 and 4 (refer to No te 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the front of

the seat.

Does the multimeter indicate 8 – 15 V (refer to Note 5)?

Hall-effect sensor

and associated

wiring serviceable Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connector Y67 – X1 pin 2 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X4 from the seat memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X4 pin 8 and Y67 – X1 pin 4 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 3040 (refer to

Note 2)

6 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connectors A21 – X4 pin 10 and Y67 – X1 pin 3 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

hall-effect sensor,

refer to 5.19 Drive

Motor Hall-effect

Sensors

Repair or replace

circuit 557 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–126

Page 1A7A–126

Seat Rear Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check

Introduction

The seat rear lift motor hall-effect sensor provides a pulse signal to the seat memory module. This signal represents the

vertical position of the rear of the seat.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the hall-effect sensor connector is secure.

3 Checks the AC output from the hall-effect sensor during operation.

4 Checks if the ground circuit is serviceable.

5-6 Checks if there is continuity between connectors Y69 – X1 and A21 – X4. Isolates if the hall-effect sensor is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

5 The AC voltage displayed will depend on the battery voltage supplied to the seat. At 16 V DC supply, the AC

voltage produced by the hall-effect sensor will be appro ximately 15 V. At 9 V DC supply, the AC voltage produced

by the hall-effect sensor will be approximatel y 8 V.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Ensure connector Y69 – X1 is secure.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Module / Diagnostic Data

Display / Inputs and Outputs.

4 Scroll to Rear Vertical Position Senso r.

Does Tech 2 show the position sensor as Connected? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across

connector Y69 – X1 pins 2 and 4 (refer to No te 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise or lower the rear of

the seat.

Does the multimeter indicate 8 – 15 V (refer to Note 5)?

Hall-effect sensor

and associated

wiring serviceable Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connector Y69 – X1 pin 2 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

5 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X4 from the seat memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X4 pin 7 and Y69 – X1 pin 4 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 2940 (refer to

Note 2)

6 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connectors A21 – X4 pin 9 and Y69 – X1 pin 3 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

hall-effect sensor,

refer to 5.19 Drive

Motor Hall-effect

Sensors

Repair or replace

circuit 568 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–127

Page 1A7A–127

Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check

Introduction

The seat fore/aft movement motor hall-effect sensor provides a pulse sign al to the seat memory module. This signal

represents the horizontal position of the seat.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the hall-effect sensor connector is secure.

3 Checks the AC output from the hall-effect sensor during operation.

4 Checks if the ground circuit is serviceable.

5 Checks if there is continuity between harness connectors Y64 – X1 and A21 – X4. Isolates if the hall-effect sensor

is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

5 The AC voltage displayed will depend on the battery voltage supplied to the seat. At 16 V DC supply, the AC

voltage produced by the hall-effect sensor will be approximately 6 V. At 9 V DC supply, the AC voltage produced by

the hall-effect sensor will be appro ximately 0.6 V.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Ensure connector Y64 – X1 is secure.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Module / Diagnostic Data

Display / Inputs and Outputs.

4 Scroll to Horizontal Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 show the position sensor as Connected? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across

connector Y64 – X1 pins 3 and 4 (refer to No te 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat fore or aft.

Does the multimeter indicate 0.6 – 6 V (refer to Note 5)?

Hall-effect sensor

and associated

wiring serviceable Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connector Y64 – X1 pin 3 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connectors A21 – X4 pin 5 and Y64 – X1 pin 4 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

hall-effect sensor,

refer to 5.19 Drive

Motor Hall-effect

Sensors

Repair or replace

circuit 569 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–128

Page 1A7A–128

Seat-back Recline Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check

Introduction

The seat-back recline motor hall-effect sensor provides a pulse signal to the seat memory module. This signal represents

the recline position of the seat.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the hall-effect sensor connector is secure.

3 Checks the AC output from the hall-effect sensor during operation.

4 Checks if the ground circuit is serviceable.

5 Checks if there is continuity between harness connectors Y74 – X1 and A21 – X2. Isolates if the hall-effect sensor

is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

5 The AC voltage displayed will depend on the battery voltage supplied to the seat. At 16 V DC supply, the AC

voltage produced by the hall-effect sensor will be approximately 6 V. At 9 V DC supply, the AC voltage produced by

the hall-effect sensor will be appro ximately 0.6 V.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 Ensure connector Y74 – X1 is secure.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Module / Diagnostic Data

Display / Inputs and Outputs.

4 Scroll to Recline Position Sensor.

Does Tech 2 show the position sensor as Connected? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across

connector Y74 – X1 pins 2 and 4 (refer to No te 1).

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the seat-back fore

or aft.

Does the multimeter indicate 0.6 – 6 V (refer to Note 5)?

Hall-effect sensor

and associated

wiring serviceable Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connector Y74 – X1 pin 2 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance , probe between

connectors A21 – X2 pin 1 and Y74 – X1 pin 4 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

hall-effect sensor,

refer to 5.19 Drive

Motor Hall-effect

Sensors

Repair or replace

circuit 570 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–129

Page 1A7A–129

Priority Key Feature Inoperative

Introduction

The priority key function int erfaces with numerous systems on the vehicle. When the ve hicle is unlocked using the

remote control, the seat memory module is activated by the interior illumination relay. Depend ing upon which key is us ed

(priority key 1 or priority key 2), the driver's seat moves to the position in which it was set when the vehicle was locked

using the remote control of that priority key.

NOTE

The priority key function also affects the exterior

rear-view mirror position.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if there is battery power supplied to the seat memory module from the interior illumination relay.

2 Checks if the interior illumination circuit operates correctly. Isolates whether circuit 149 is faulty or there is a fault

with the interior illumination circuit and the BCM.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 With any vehicle door open, backprobe connector A21 – X3 pin 10

with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module Go to Step 2

2 When the vehicle's door is o pened, does the interior light illuminate? Repair or replace

circuit 149 between

connector

A21 – X3 pin 10 and

the interior

illumination rela y

R24 on the

passenger

compartment fuse

and relay panel

assembly (refer to

Note 2)

Check the interior

illumination rela y

R24 for

serviceability, refer

to 12J Body Control

Module, for priority

key diagnosis

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–130

Page 1A7A–130

DTC 1 – Front Vertical Up Switch Stuck – RHD

Introduction

When a DTC 1 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating the seat front up function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1518 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 151 8 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 10 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1518 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–131

Page 1A7A–131

DTC 1 – Front Vertical Up Switch Stuck – LHD

Introduction

When a DTC 1 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating the seat front up function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1518 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 151 8 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1518 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–132

Page 1A7A–132

DTC 2 – Front Vertical Down Switch Stuck – RHD

Introduction

When a DTC 2 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat front down function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1520 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 0 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch assembly, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 7 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1520 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–133

Page 1A7A–133

DTC 2 – Front Vertical Down Switch Stuck – LHD

Introduction

When a DTC 2 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat front down function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1520 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 0 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch assembly, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 10 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1520 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–134

Page 1A7A–134

DTC 3 – Rear Vertical Up Switch Stuck – RHD

Introduction

When a DTC 3 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat rear up function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1519 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 151 9 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 9 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1519 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–135

Page 1A7A–135

DTC 3 – Rear Vertical Up Switch Stuck – LHD

Introduction

When a DTC 3 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat rear up function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1519 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 151 9 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 8 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1519 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–136

Page 1A7A–136

DTC 4 – Rear Vertical Down Switch Stuck – RHD

Introduction

When a DTC 4 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat rear down function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosi ng the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1521 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 1 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 8 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1521 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–137

Page 1A7A–137

DTC 4 – Rear Vertical Down Sw itch Stuck – LHD

Introduction

When a DTC 4 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat rear down function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat

memory module and associated comp onents.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1521 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 1 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 9 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1521 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–138

Page 1A7A–138

DTC 5 – Horizontal Forward Switch Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 5 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat forward function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1523 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 3 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 6 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1523 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–139

Page 1A7A–139

DTC 6 – Horizontal Back Switch Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 6 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat aft function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1522 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 152 2 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 3 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1522 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–140

Page 1A7A–140

DTC 7 – Recline Up Switch Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 7 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat-back forward function of the

seat adjustment switch has been activated for 8 seconds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1269 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 126 9 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1269 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–141

Page 1A7A–141

DTC 8 – Recline Down Switch Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 8 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that the seat-back aft function of the seat

adjustment switch has been activated for 8 secon ds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the seat adjustment switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 1270 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 127 0 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Test the seat adjustment switch, refer to 3.5 Eight-way Seat

Adjustment Switch Test.

Is the seat adjustment switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the seat

adjustment switch,

refer to 5.4 Front

Seat Outer Side

Cover Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector S51 – X1 from the seat adjustme nt switch.

2 Backprobe connector S51 – X1 pin 4 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 1270 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–142

Page 1A7A–142

DTC 9 – Memory Button 1 Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 9 is set, the seat memory module receives an input indicating that memory button 1 on the memory position

switch has been activated for 8 seconds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the memory position switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 615 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 615 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Remove the memory position s witch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X3 pin 9 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 615 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–143

Page 1A7A–143

DTC 10 – Memory Button 2 Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 10 is set, the seat memory module receiv es an input indicating that button 2 on the memory position switch

has been activated for 8 seconds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the memory position switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 616 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 616 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Remove the memory position s witch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X3 pin 8 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 616 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–144

Page 1A7A–144

DTC 11 – Memory Button 3 Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 11 is set, the seat memory module receiv es an input indicating that button 3 on the memory position switch

has been activated for 8 seconds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the memory position switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 614 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 614 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Remove the memory position s witch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X3 pin 19 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 614 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–145

Page 1A7A–145

DTC 12 – Mirror DIP Button Stuck

Introduction

When a DTC 12 is set, the seat memory module receiv es an input indicating that the mirror dip / memory store button M

on the memory position s witch has been activ ated for 8 seconds or more.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Memory Seat, LHD and

Connector Chart – Memory Seat to aid in diagnosing the seat memory module an d associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if the memory position switch is serviceable.

2 Checks if circuit 2293 is shorted to battery. Isolates whether circuit 229 3 or the seat memory module is at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Remove the memory position s witch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat

Outer Side Cover Assembly.

2 Test the memory position switch, refer to 4.9 Memory Position

Switch Test.

Is the memory position switch serviceable? Go to Step 2

Replace the

memory position

switch, refer to 5.4

Front Seat Outer

Side Cover

Assembly

2 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Backprobe connector A21 – X3 pin 18 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 2293 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–146

Page 1A7A–146

DTC 13 – No Serial Data

If DTC 13 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to No Serial Data Communications to the Seat Memory Module in this Section.

DTC 14 – No Exterior Mirror Communications

If DTC 14 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to 4.10 Electrical Diagnosis – Rear-view Mirrors, Initial Check.

DTC 20 – Front Vertical Position Sensor Fault

If DTC 20 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to Seat Front Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check noting the following:

The initial check does not hav e to be performed, therefore start the diagnostic procedure at Step 2.

DTC 21 – Rear Vertical Position Sensor Fault

If DTC 21 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to Seat Rear Lift Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check noting the following:

The initial check does not hav e to be performed, therefore start the diagnostic procedure at Step 2.

DTC 22 – Horizontal Position Sensor Fault

If DTC 22 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check noting the following:

The initial check does not hav e to be performed, therefore start the diagnostic procedure at Step 2.

DTC 23 – Recline Position Sensor Fault

If DTC 23 is displayed by Tech 2, refer to Seat-back Recline Motor Hall-effect Sensor Check noting the following:

The initial check does not hav e to be performed, therefore start the diagnostic procedure at Step 2.

DTC 24 – System Voltage Out of Range

Replace the seat memory module, refer to 5.12 Seat Cable Tr ay and Memory Module.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–147

Page 1A7A–147

4.9 Memory Position Switch Test

The switch is located on the outer side of the seat, attached to the inner side of the front seat outer side cover.

Remove

To remove the memory position switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Reinstall

To reinstall the memory position switch, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Test

1 Place the switch in the positions as detailed i n the chart in this Section. Place the probes of the digital multimeter

onto the terminals listed and take the readin g. Compare the reading to the chart.

2 When testing the LED, ensure multimeter is set to diode range and n ote p olarity of probes.

3 If the switch fails any part of the test, replace the switch assembly with a serviceabl e item.

Figure 1A7A – 21

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–148

Page 1A7A–148

Right-hand Seat Memory Position Switch

Switch Depressed Switch Terminals Indication if Switch is Serviceable

------------ 6 and 1, 2, 3 and 4 Open circuit

Button 1 6 and 1 Continuity

Button 2 6 and 2 Continuity

Button 3 6 and 3 Continuity

Button M 6 and 4 Continuity

------------ 5 (+) probe and 6 (–) probe LED illuminated

Left-hand Seat Memory Position Switch

Switch Depressed Switch Terminals Indication if Switch is Serviceable

------------ 1 and 3, 4, 5 and 6 Open circuit

Button 1 1 and 6 Continuity

Button 2 1 and 5 Continuity

Button 3 1 and 4 Continuity

Button M 1 and 3 Continuity

------------ 2 (+) probe and 1 (–) probe LED illuminated

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–149

Page 1A7A–149

4.10 Electrical Diagnosis – Rear-view Mirrors

Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD

Figure 1A7A – 22

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–150

Page 1A7A–150

Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD

Figure 1A7A – 23

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–151

Page 1A7A–151

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors

Figure 1A7A – 24

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–152

Page 1A7A–152

Initial Check

Introduction

This operational check uses Tech 2 to test the functionality of the exterior rear-view mirrors and iso lates which system is

faulty. The seat memory module provides electrical power, ground and serial data communications to the mirrors. As

described in 1 General Information, the mirrors can be controlle d:

• manually by the mirror control switch located on the driver's door,

• by pressing any of the memory buttons on the memor y pos ition switch, and

• to dip when reversing (passenger’s mirror o nly).

Refer to 1 General Information for further details on the operation of the exterior rear-vie w mirror.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD and

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors to aid in diagnosing the exterior rear-view mirrors and associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

1 Checks if Tech 2 can communicate with the seat memory module.

2 Checks for existence of any diagnostic trouble codes.

3 Checks whether Tech 2 is receiving serial d ata from the exterior rear-view mirrors and the mirror control switch via

the rear-view mirror. All serial data communications need to be interrupted to these assemblies i n order for Tech 2

to indicate there is a problem.

4 Checks if serial data is being received at right exterior mirror only.

5 Checks if serial data is being received at left exterior mirror only.

6-9 Checks if the mirror control switch is serviceabl e. Isolates if the exterior rear-view mirrors and circuits are

serviceable.

10 Checks if the mirror dip function is serviceable.

11 Checks if the mirror heating function is serviceable.

12 Checks if the memory recall function of the exterior rear-view mirrors is serviceable. This function is controlled by

the seat memory module which transmits a signal throu gh the serial bus to inform the mirrors what position they

should be in. The exterior rear-view mirror assemblies store the physical position within their own modules. If the

seat aspect of this feature is operational, the exterior rear-view mirror assembly is faulty and must be replaced.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–153

Page 1A7A–153

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module.

3 Turn the ignition switch on.

Does the System Identification Screen displa y system information? Go to Step 2 The seat memory

module is at fault

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Are there any diagnostic trou ble codes displayed? Go to appropriate

DTC table Go to Step 3

3 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module /

Diagnostic Data Display / Inputs And Outputs.

2 Scroll to Button Pack Communication.

Does Tech 2 display Okay? Go to Step 4

Refer to No Serial

Data from Exterior

Rear-view Mirrors

in this Section

4 On Tech 2 select:

Right Exterior Mirror Communication.

Does Tech 2 display Okay?

Go to Step 5

Refer to No Serial

Data – Right-hand

Exterior Rear-view

Mirror in this

Section

5 On Tech 2 select:

Left Exterior Mirror Communication.

Does Tech 2 display Okay?

Go to Step 6

Refer to No Serial

Data – Left-hand

Exterior Rear-view

Mirror in this

Section

6 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module /

Diagnostic Data Display / Input and Output.

2 Scroll to Right Exterior Mirror Switch.

3 Monitor Tech 2.

4 Move the rocker switch on the rear-view mirror switch to the

position to control the right ext erior mirror.

5 Using the rear-view mirror switch:

• Press the mirror up switch.

• Press the mirror down switch.

• Press the mirror left switch.

• Press the mirror right switch.

Does Tech 2 display Up, Down , Left, then Right during operation? Go to Step 7

Refer to Mirror

Control Switch

Inoperative in this

Section

7 During the test in Step 6, does the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror

move in the following directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the mirror does not

move.

• When the switch is in the up position, the mirror moves up.

• When the switch is in the down position, the mirror moves

down.

• When the switch is in the right position, the mirror moves righ t.

• When the switch is in the left position, the mirror moves left.

NOTE

Ensure that the mirror is not at its maximum limit of travel

in any direction when performing this test. Go to Step 8

Replace the

right-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–154

Page 1A7A–154

Step Action Yes No

8 1 On Tech 2 select:

Left Exterior Mirror Switch.

2 Monitor Tech 2.

3 Move the rocker switch on the rear-view mirror switch to the

position to control the left exterior mirror.

4 Using the rear-view mirror switch:

• Press the mirror up switch.

• Press the mirror down switch.

• Press the mirror left switch.

• Press the mirror right switch.

Does Tech 2 display Up, Down, Left, then Right during operation? Go to Step 9

Refer to Mirror

Control Switch

Inoperative in this

Section

9 During the test in Step 8, does the left-hand exterior rear-vie w mirror

move in the following directions?

• When the switch is in the neutral position, the mirror does not

move.

• When the switch is in the up position, the mirror moves up.

• When the switch is in the down position, the mirror moves

down.

• When the switch is in the right position, the mirror moves righ t.

• When the switch is in the left position, the mirror moves left.

NOTE

Ensure that the mirror is not at its maximum limit of travel

in any direction when performing this test. Go to Step 10

Replace the

left-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

10 Does the mirror dip function operate correctly? Refer to Mirror Dip

Function Check in

this Section Go to Step 11

11 Does the mirror heating function operate correctly? Refer to Mirror

Heating Function

Check in this

Section Go to Step 12

12 Does the memory recall function of the exterior rear-view mirrors

operate correctly? If both exterior

rear-view mirrors

are unable to recall

memory positions,

check the

functionality of the

seat, refer to Initial

Check in 4.8

Electrical Diagnosis

– Memory Seat.

If only one mirror is

unable to recall

memory positions,

replace the mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors System serviceable

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–155

Page 1A7A–155

Mirror Dip Function Check

Introduction

The mirror dip function is operational when:

• the mirror dip function is enabled, refer to 1 General Information for details,

• a position for the passenger's exterior rear-view mirror is stored as the mirror dip, and

• the transmission selector must be placed in REVERSE position.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the mirror DIP function is enabled.

3 Checks if the mirror DIP function operates and is positioned correctly.

4 Checks if the mirror DIP function returns an Active message on Tech 2 when the transmission selector is placed in

REVERSE position. Isolates whether there is a fault with the seat memory module or with the serial data from the

transmission selector.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module /

Diagnostic Data Display / Memory.

2 Scroll to Priority 1.

Does Tech 2 display Mirror Dip Button as Enabled? Go to Step 3

Enable mirror DIP

function, refer to 1

General

Information.

Go to Step 3

3 1 Ensure the stored mirror DIP position is noticeably different

from the standard position of the left exterior mirror, refer to 1

General Information.

2 Check the mirror DIP function by placing the transmission

selector in reverse.

Does the mirror DIP function operate? System serviceable Go to Step 4

4 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module /

Diagnostic Data Display / Inputs and Outputs.

2 Scroll to Reverse Gear.

Does Tech 2 display Reverse Gear as Active?

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Refer to 6C3

Powertrain

Management for V8

6C2 Powertrain

Management for V6

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–156

Page 1A7A–156

Mirror Heating Function Check

Introduction

When the demist button on the instrument panel is pressed to activate the demist function, the request is sent via the

serial data bus to the exterior rear-view mirror assemblies.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if Tech 2 confirms the demist function has been activated.

3 Checks if the heater element in the right-hand e xterior rear-view mirror operates when the ignition and rear window

demister are switched on.

4 Checks if the right-hand mirror heater element is servicea bl e. Isolates whether the heater element or the exterior

rear-view mirror assembly is at fault.

5 Checks if the heater element in the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror operates when the ignition and rear window

demister are switched on.

6 Checks if the left-hand mirror heater element is serviceable. Isolates whether the heater element or the exterior

rear-view mirror assembly is at fault.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Seat and Exterior Mirror Memory Module /

Diagnostic Data Display / Inputs and Outputs.

2 Scroll to Demist Request.

3 Turn on the rear window demister.

Does Tech 2 display Demist Req uest as Yes? Go to Step 3

Refer to 12J Body

Control Module.

Go to Step 3

3 Operate the rear window demister for 2 – 3 minutes.

Does the right-hand exterior mirror feel warm? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4

Turn off the rear window demister before removing

and replacing the righ t-hand exterior mirror glass.

Test the heater element of the right-hand ext erior re ar-view mirror,

refer to Section 12H Rear-view Mirrors.

Is the heater element serviceable?

Replace the

right-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

Replace the

right-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

glass, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors.

Go to Step 5

5 Operate the rear window demister for 2 – 3 minutes.

Does the left-hand exterior mirror feel warm? System serviceable Go to Step 6

Turn off the rear window demister before removing

and replacing the left-hand exterior mirror glass.

Test the heater element of the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror,

refer to Section 12H Rear-view Mirrors.

Is the heater element serviceable?

Replace the

left-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

Replace the

left-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

glass, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–157

Page 1A7A–157

No Serial Data from Exterior Rear-view Mirrors

Introduction

The exterior rear-view mirrors have a common power, ground and serial data connector at the seat memory module. If

the circuit is followed, there are two splices in each of the po wer, grou nd and data communication circuits. In this test, as

there are not serial data communications with any of the exterior rear-view mirrors, it is assumed that the fault will be in a

location common to all circuits.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD and

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors to aid in diagnosing the exterior rear-view mirrors and associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the connectors which are common to the serial data communication for the exterior rear-vie w mirrors are

secure.

3 Checks if battery voltage is present for the exterior rear-view mirror system at the seat memory module.

4 Checks if the seat memory module is supplying a ground circuit for the exterior rear-view mirror system.

5 Checks the battery supply circuit for a short to ground.

6 Checks the ground circuit for a short to battery.

7 Checks if there is continuity in the serial data circuit between connectors A21 – X3 pin 11 and X500 pin 7. Isolates

whether there is an open circuit in circuit 787 that will affect both the exterior rear-view mirrors or the seat memory

module is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–158

Page 1A7A–158

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Ensure the following connectors are secure (refer to Note 3)?

• A21 – X3

• A21 – X4

• X315 Go to Step 3 Secure the relevant

connectors

3 1 Disconnect connectors A21 – X3 and A21 – X4 from the seat

memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between seat

memory module A21 – X3 pin 1 and a known ground (refer to

Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate batter y voltage? Go to Step 4

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between seat

memory module A21 – X4 pin 16 and a known ground (refer to Note

1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 5

Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector A21 – X3 pin 1 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Repair or replace

circuit 881 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 6

6 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between connector

A21 – X4 pin 16 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate batter y voltage ?

Repair or replace

circuit 785 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 7

7 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X3 pin 11 and X500 pin 7 (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Replace the seat

memory module,

refer to 5.12 Seat

Cable Tray and

Memory Module

Repair or replace

circuit 787 between

connector

A21 – X3 pin 11

and the first splice

on circuit 787 (refer

to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–159

Page 1A7A–159

No Serial Data – Right-hand Exterior Rear-view Mirror

Introduction

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD and

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors to aid in diagnosing the exterior rear-view mirrors and associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery voltage supplied to the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 881 between connecto rs X602 and A21 – X3.

3 Checks if the ground circuit for the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror is serviceable. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 785 between connecto rs X602 and A21 – X4.

4 Checks the serial data circuit for the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror for integrity. Isolates whether there is a

fault in circuit 787 between connectors A21 – X3 and X602 or the right-hand exterior rear-view mirror assembly is

faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Backprobe connector X602 pin B with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 881 between

connectors X602

and A21 – X3 (refer

to Note 2)

3 1 Disconnect harness connector X602.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector X602 pin D and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 785 between

connectors X602

and A21 – X4 (refer

to Note 2)

4 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X3 pin 11 and X602 pin A (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

right-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

Repair or replace

circuit 787 between

connectors

A21 – X3 and X602

(refer to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–160

Page 1A7A–160

No Serial Data – Left-hand Exterior Rear-view Mirror

Introduction

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD and

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors to aid in diagnosing the exterior rear-view mirrors and associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is battery voltage supplied to the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 881 between connecto rs X502 and A21 – X3.

3 Checks if the ground circuit for the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror is serviceable. Isolates if there is a fault in

circuit 785 between connecto rs X502 and A21 – X4.

4 Checks the serial data circuit for the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror for integrity. Isolates whether there is a fault

in circuit 787 between connectors A21 – X3 and X502 or the left-hand exterior rear-view mirror assembly is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Backprobe connector X502 pin B with a test lamp (refer to Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

circuit 881 between

connectors X502

and A21 – X3 (refer

to Note 2)

3 1 Disconnect harness connector X502.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector X502 pin D and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 785 between

connectors X502

and A21 – X4 (refer

to Note 2)

4 1 Disconnect connector A21 – X3 from the seat memory module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A21 – X3 pin 11 and X502 pin A (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

left-hand exterior

rear-view mirror

assembly, refer to

Section 12H Rear-

view Mirrors

Repair or replace

circuit 787 between

connectors

A21 – X3 and X502

(refer to Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–161

Page 1A7A–161

Mirror Control Switch Inoperative

Introduction

When the mirror control switch is used, the signal that it generates is converted by the rear-view mirror module to serial

data. It is then transmitted over the serial data bus. The exterior rear-vie w mirrors then receive this serial data and move

the appropriate exterior rear-view mirror in the direction that was requested by the mirror control switch.

Refer to Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, RHD, Wiring Diagram – Rear-view Mirrors, LHD and

Connector Chart – Rear-view Mirrors to aid in diagnosing the exterior rear-view mirrors and associated components.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the steps in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the mirror control switch is serviceable.

3 Checks if there is battery power to the rear-view mirror module. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 881 between

connectors A73 – X2 and A21 – X3.

4 Checks if there is battery power to the mirror control switch. Isolates if the rear-view mirror modul e is at fault.

5 Checks if the ground circuit for the rear-view mirror module i s serviceable. Isolates if there is a fault in circuit 785

between connectors A73 – X2 and A21 – X4.

6 Checks if the ground circuit for the mirror control switch is serviceable. Isolates if the rear-view mirror module is at

fault.

7 Checks if there is continuity on the serial data bus between connectors A73 – X2 and A21 – X3. Isolates whether

there is an open circuit in circuit 787 between connectors A73 – X2 and A21 – X3 or the rear-vie w mem ory module

is faulty.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 For all wiring harness fault diagnoses, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagram s.

2 For wiring harness repairs, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

3 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

4 If the fault is deemed to be intermittent, refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–162

Page 1A7A–162

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Initial Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Perform the Initial

Check in this

Section

2 Test the mirror control switch, refer to Section 12H Rear-view Mirrors.

Is the mirror control switch serviceable? Go to Step 3

Replace the mirror

control switch, refer

to Section 12H

Rear-view Mirrors

3 Backprobe connector A73 – X2 pin 2 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

circuit 881 between

connectors

A73 – X2 and

A21 – X3 (refer to

Note 2)

4 Backprobe connector S169 – X1 pin 1 with a test lamp (refer to

Note 1).

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 5

Replace the

rear-view mirror

module, refer to

Section 1A5 Front

and Rear Door

Assemblies

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector A73 – X2 pin 1 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 785 between

connectors

A73 – X2 and

A21 – X4 (refer to

Note 2)

6 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connector S169 – X1 pin 2 and a known ground (refer to Note 1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Go to Step 7

Replace the

rear-view mirror

module, refer to

Section 1A5 Front

and Rear Door

Assemblies

7 1 Disconnect connectors A21 – X3 from the seat memory module

and A73 – X2 from the rear-vie w mirror module.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

connectors A73 –X2 pin 3 and a A21 – X3 pin 11 (refer to Note

1).

Does the multimeter indicate continuity?

Replace the

rear-view mirror

module, refer to

Section 1A5 Front

and Rear Door

Assemblies

Repair or replace

circuit 787 between

connectors

A73 – X2 and

A21 – X3 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagno sis an d repairs are completed, clear all DT Cs and check the system fo r correct operation.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–163

Page 1A7A–163

5 Service Operations – Front Seat

5.1 Usage Chart

How To Use This Chart

The following usage chart is provided to help determine the seat type fitted to the vehicle. This is important prior to

repairs being performed as the failed/damaged part may no t be serviced.

To determine the seat type fitted to the vehicle, obtain the vehicl e model, which seat requires attention and the seat

cover fabric. Establish other features of the seat such as th e electric movement functions. Using the chart will lead to the

elimination of all other seat combinations, al lowing for the identification of the type and the construction of the seat.

Refer to the Figure number shown in Front Seat Type column for a component break down of the front seat assembly.

1 Vehicle – Vehicle model identification.

2 Seating – Driver front seat or passenger front seat.

3 Fabric – Cloth or leather seat covers.

4 Movement – Indicates the number of electric movement functions of the seat:

• Four-way – Seat cushion electric front and re ar raise/lower.

• Six-way – As four- way plus s eat cushion electric fore/aft movement.

• Eight-way – As six-way plus electric seat-back recline.

5 Memory – Indicates if a seat memory module is fitted.

6 SIAB – If the seat is fitted with a side impact airbag assembly.

7 Construction – Surebond refers to the seat cover being glued to the seat pad. This type i s serviced as a pad and

cover assembly only. Hook and Loop refers to the seat cover being attached to the seat pad with a Velcro type

material and both being servi ced as separate parts.

8 Head Restraint – Indicates whether fixed or active head res t raints are fitted.

9 Front Seat Type – Identifies the seat type and provides reference to illustrations which show a breakdown of the

serviced component for each front seat assembly.

Domestic

Vehicle Seating Fabric Movement Memory SIAB Construction Head

Restraint Front Seat Type

(refer to)

Driver Cloth/

Leather Eight- way No Yes Hook & Loop Active 1

(Figure 1A7A – 25)

Statesman

– Level 4

Passenger Cloth/

Leather Eight -way No Yes Hook & Loop Active 2

(Figure 1A7A – 26)

Driver Leather Eight- way Yes Yes Hook & Loop Active 3

(Figure 1A7A – 27)

Caprice

– Level 5

Passenger Leather Eight-way No Yes Hook & Loop Active 4

(Figure 1A7A – 28)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–164

Page 1A7A–164

Gulf States

Vehicle Seating Fabric Movement Memory SIAB Construction Head

Restraint Front Seat Type

(refer to)

Driver Cloth Six-way No No Surebond Fixed 5

(Figure 1A7A – 29)

Passenger Cloth Four-way No No Surebond Fixed 6

(Figure 1A7A – 30)

Driver Cloth Eight-way No No Surebond Fixed 7

(Figure 1A7A – 31)

Caprice LS

– Level 1

Passenger Cloth Eight-way No No Surebond Fixed 8

(Figure 1A7A – 32)

Driver Cloth/

Leather Eight- way No Yes Hook & Loop Fixed 9

(Figure 1A7A – 33)

Caprice

LTZ

– Level 2 Passenger Cloth/

Leather Eight -way No Yes Hook & Loop Fixed 10

(Figure 1A7A – 34)

Driver Leather Eight- way No Yes Hook & Loop Fixed 11

(Figure 1A7A – 35)

Caprice SS

– Level 3

Passenger Leather Eight-way No Yes Hook & Loop Fixed 12

(Figure 1A7A – 36)

Driver Leather Eight- way Yes Yes Hook & Loop Active 13

(Figure 1A7A – 37)

Caprice

Royale

– Level 5 Passenger Leather Eight-way No Yes Hook & Loop Active 14

(Figure 1A7A – 38)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–165

Page 1A7A–165

Front Seat Type 1

Figure 1A7A – 25

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–166

Page 1A7A–166

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Pad – Cloth Cover

16 Front Seat-back Cloth Cover

17 Front Seat-back Pad – Leather Cover

18 Front Seat-back Leather Cover

19 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

30 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

31 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

32 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

33 Front Seat Cushion Cloth Cover

34 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Cloth Cover

35 Front Seat Cushion Leather Cover

36 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Leather Cover

37 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

38 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

39 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

40 Wiring Harness Assembly

41 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

42 Front Seat Cable Tray

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–167

Page 1A7A–167

Front Seat Type 2

Figure 1A7A – 26

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–168

Page 1A7A–168

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Pad – Cloth Cover

16 Front Seat-back Cloth Cover

17 Front Seat-back Pad – Leather Cover

18 Front Seat-back Leather Cover

19 Front Seat Dummy Block u-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

30 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

31 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

32 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

33 Front Seat Cushion Cloth Cover

34 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Cloth Cover

35 Front Seat Cushion Leather Cover

36 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Leather Cover

37 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

38 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

39 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

40 Wiring Harness Assembly

41 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

42 Front Seat Cable Tray

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–169

Page 1A7A–169

Front Seat Type 3

Figure 1A7A – 27

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–170

Page 1A7A–170

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Memory Position Switch Cover

9 Memory Position Switch Assembly

10 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

11 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

12 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

13 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly*

15 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

16 Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Cover

17 Front Seat-back Cover

18 Front Seat-back Pad

19 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

30 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

31 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

32 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

33 Front Seat Cushion Cover

34 Front Seat Cushion Pad

35 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

36 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

37 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

38 Wiring Harness Assembly

39 Seat Memory Module

40 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

41 Rear Seat Entertainment Lower Wiring Harness Assembly

42 Front Seat Cable Tray

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 39 for the front head restraint assembly compone nts.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–171

Page 1A7A–171

Front Seat Type 4

Figure 1A7A – 28

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–172

Page 1A7A–172

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly*

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Cover

15 Front Seat-back Cover

16 Front Seat-back Pad Cover

17 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

18 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

19 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

20 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

21 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

22 Lumbar Support Knob

23 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

24 Lumbar Support Assembly

25 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

26 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

27 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

30 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

31 Front Seat Cushion Cover

32 Front Seat Cushion Pad

33 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

34 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

35 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

36 Wiring Harness Assembly

37 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

38 Rear Seat Entertainment Lower Wiring Harness Assembly

39 Front Seat Cable Tray

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 39 for the front head restraint assembly compone nts.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–173

Page 1A7A–173

Front Seat Type 5

Figure 1A7A – 29

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–174

Page 1A7A–174

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Six-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Recline Adjuster Knob

12 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

15 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

16 Front Seat-back Cover and Pad Assembly

17 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

18 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

19 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

20 Lumbar Support Assembly

21 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clip

22 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

23 Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad

24 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

25 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

26 Wiring Harness Assembly

27 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

28 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knob

29 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket

30 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

31 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

32 Front Seat Cable Tray

33 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–175

Page 1A7A–175

Front Seat Type 6

Figure 1A7A – 30

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–176

Page 1A7A–176

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Four-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Recline Adjuster Knob

12 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

15 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

16 Front Seat-back Cover and Pad Assembly

17 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

18 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

19 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

20 Lumbar Support Assembly

21 Front Seat-back Cover retaining Clip

22 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

23 Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad

24 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

25 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

26 Wiring Harness Assembly

27 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

28 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knob

29 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

30 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

31 Front Seat Cable Tray

32 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–177

Page 1A7A–177

Front Seat Type 7

Figure 1A7A – 31

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–178

Page 1A7A–178

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Cover and Pad Assembly

16 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

17 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

18 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

19 Lumbar Support Assembly

20 Front Seat-back Cover retaining Clip

21 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

22 Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad

23 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

24 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

25 Wiring Harness Assembly

26 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

27 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

28 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket

29 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

30 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

31 Front Seat Cable Tray

32 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–179

Page 1A7A–179

Front Seat Type 8

Figure 1A7A – 32

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–180

Page 1A7A–180

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Cover and Pad Assembly

16 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

17 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

18 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

19 Lumbar Support Assembly

20 Front Seat-back Cover retaining Clip

21 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

22 Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad

23 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

24 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

25 Wiring Harness Assembly

26 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

27 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

28 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

29 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

30 Front Seat Cable Tray

31 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–181

Page 1A7A–181

Front Seat Type 9

Figure 1A7A – 33

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–182

Page 1A7A–182

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Pad – Cloth Cover

16 Front Seat-back Cloth Cover

17 Front Seat-back Pad – Leather Cover

18 Front Seat-back Leather Cover

19 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

29 Front Seat Cushion Cloth Cover

30 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Cloth Cover

31 Front Seat Cushion Leather Cover

32 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Leather Cover

33 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

34 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

35 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

36 Wiring Harness Assembly

37 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

38 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket

39 Front Seat Cable Tray

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–183

Page 1A7A–183

Front Seat Type 10

Figure 1A7A – 34

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–184

Page 1A7A–184

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Pad – Cloth Cover

16 Front Seat-back Cloth Cover

17 Front Seat-back Pad – Leather Cover

18 Front Seat-back Leather Cover

19 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

29 Front Seat Cushion Cloth Cover

30 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Cloth Cover

31 Front Seat Cushion Leather Cover

32 Front Seat Cushion Pad – Leather Cover

33 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

34 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

35 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

36 Wiring Harness Assembly

37 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

38 Front Seat Cable Tray

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–185

Page 1A7A–185

Front Seat Type 11

Figure 1A7A – 35

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–186

Page 1A7A–186

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Cover

16 Front Seat-back Pad

17 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

18 Lumbar Support Assembly

19 Front Seat-back Cover retaining Clip

20 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

23 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

24 Front Seat Cushion Pad

25 Front Seat Cushion Cover

26 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

27 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

28 Wiring Harness Assembly

29 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

30 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

31 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket

32 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

33 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

34 Front Seat Cable Tray

35 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–187

Page 1A7A–187

Front Seat Type 12

Figure 1A7A – 36

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–188

Page 1A7A–188

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

7 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

8 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

9 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

10 Lumber Support Deflector Ring

11 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad Assembly

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

15 Front Seat-back Cover

16 Front Seat-back Pad

17 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

18 Lumbar Support Assembly

19 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clip

20 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

23 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

24 Front Seat Cushion Pad

25 Front Seat Cushion Cover

26 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

27 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

28 Wiring Harness Assembly

29 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

30 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

31 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

32 Lumbar Support Knob

33 Front Seat Cable Tray

34 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–189

Page 1A7A–189

Front Seat Type 13

Figure 1A7A – 37

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–190

Page 1A7A–190

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Memory Position Switch Cover

9 Memory Position Switch Assembly

10 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

11 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

12 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

13 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly*

15 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

16 Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Cover

17 Front Seat-back Cover

18 Front Seat-back Pad

19 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

20 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

21 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

22 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

23 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

24 Lumbar Support Knob

25 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

26 Lumbar Support Assembly

27 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

30 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

31 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

32 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

33 Front Seat Cushion Cover

34 Front Seat Cushion Pad

35 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

36 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

37 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

38 Wiring Harness Assembly

39 Seat Memory Module

40 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

41 Rear Seat Entertainment Lower Wiring Harness Assembly

42 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket

43 Front Seat Cable Tray

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 39 for the front head restraint assembly compone nts.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–191

Page 1A7A–191

Front Seat Type 14

Figure 1A7A – 38

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–192

Page 1A7A–192

Legend

1 Front Seat Outer Front Cover

2 Front Seat Outer Rear Cover

3 Front Seat Inner Front Cover

4 Front Seat Inner Rear Cover

5 Front Seat Outer Side Cover

6 Front Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs

7 Front Seat Adjustment Switch – Eight-way

8 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

9 Front Seat-back Rear Cover

10 Front Seat-back Map Pocket

11 Front Seat-back Cover Retaining Clips

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly*

13 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeves

14 Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Cover

15 Front Seat-back Cover

16 Front Seat-back Pad Cover

17 Front Seat Dummy Block U-bolt

18 Front Seat Dummy Block Insert

19 Side Impact Airbag Assembly

20 Lumbar Support Knob Cover

21 Lumbar Support Knob Screw

22 Lumbar Support Knob

23 Lumbar Support Deflector Ring

24 Lumbar Support Assembly

25 Lumbar Support Retaining Spring

26 Active Head Restraint Frame Sleeves

27 Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

28 Active Head Restraint Frame Support Strap

29 Active Head Restraint Frame Retaining Spring

30 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly

31 Front Seat Cushion Cover

32 Front Seat Cushion Pad

33 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

34 Seatbelt Buckle & Pretensioner Assembly

35 Wiring Harness Retaining Clip

36 Wiring Harness Assembly

37 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

38 Rear Seat Entertainment Lower Wiring Harness Assembly

39 Front Seat Cable Tray

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 39 for the front head restraint assembly compone nts.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–193

Page 1A7A–193

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14 Head Restraint Assembly

Figure 1A7A – 39

Legend

1 Rear Seat Entertainment Head Rest Escutcheon Assembly

2 Rear Seat Entertainment Circuit Board

3 Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Bezel

4 Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Assembly

5 Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Pivot Hinge

6 Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Mounting Plate

7 Rear Seat Entertainment Ribbon Harness

8 Rear Seat Entertainment Upper Harness

9 Front Seat Head Restraint Cover

10 Front Seat Head Restraint Pad

11 Front Seat Head Restraint Frame

12 Front Seat Head Restraint Wiring Cover

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–194

Page 1A7A–194

5.2 Fire Extinguisher Assembly

Remove

1 Remove the fire extinguisher (1) from the cover (2).

2 Remove the two screws (3) attaching the fire

extinguisher mounting br acket (4) to the track and

height adjust assembly.

3 Remove the bracket and cover from the track and

height adjust assembly. If required remove t he bracket

from the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 40

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the fire extinguisher assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specification.

Fire extinguisher mounting bracket

attaching screw torque specification.......15.0 – 20.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–195

Page 1A7A–195

5.3 Front Seat Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-295

Before performing any service operation on a

front seat assembly fitted with side impact

airbags, ensure the occupant protection

system is disabled, refer to Section 12M

Occupant Protection System.

NOTE

If the seat assembly is to be disassembled, adjust

the seat assembly to its highest position before

disconnecting the power to the seat.

NOTE

Clean hands are essential when working on the

interior trim.

Remove

Disconnection of the battery affects certain

vehicle electronic systems. Refer to Section

00, 5 Battery Disconnection Procedures

before disconnecting the battery.

1 Disconnect the battery.

2 For the driver’s seat on right-hand drive vehicles,

remove the screw (1) attaching the front seat outer

front cover (2).

3 Using a small screwdriver, push in the centre of the

join to separate the front cover and the front seat outer

lower rear cover (3).

4 Unclip the covers from the seat track and disengag e

from the side sill trim.

5 Pull the covers apart and remove the rear c over.

6 For the driver’s seat on right-hand dr ive vehicles, slide

the front cover over the fuel filler door release lever (4)

and remove.

Figure 1A7A – 41

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–196

Page 1A7A–196

7 Disconnect the body wiring ha r ness connector (1), the

seatbelt pretensioner wiring connector (2) and the side

impact airbag wiring connector (3), if fitted.

8 On vehicles fitted with Type 3, 4, 13 & 14 front seats,

disconnect the rear seat entertainm ent lower wiring

harness from the front of the seat track.

Figure 1A7A – 42

9 Unclip the front seat inner rear cover (1) from the seat

track (2).

Figure 1A7A – 43

10 Unclip the front seat inner front cover (1) from the seat

track (2).

Figure 1A7A – 44

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–197

Page 1A7A–197

11 Remove the four screws (1) attaching the front seat to

the vehicle.

12 Remove the seat from the vehicle.

Figure 1A7A – 45

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Position the front seat assembly into the vehicle.

2 Install the four screws securing the front seat.

3 Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specification.

Front seat assembly attaching

screw torque specification.......................35.0 – 50.0 Nm

4 Connect the seat wiring harness connector, seatbelt pretensioner harness connector and the side impact airbag

connector.

5 Align the front seat outer cover’s retaining clips and push firmly to engage.

6 Push the front of the front seat outer cover do wn to engage the cover with the front of the seat rail.

7 For the driver’s side on right-hand drive vehicles, install the front seat outer cover attaching screw and tighten to the

specified torque.

Front seat outer front cover attaching

screw torque specification...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

8 Check the operation of the front seat functions. While checking the seat adjustment/operation, al so check that the

seat wiring harnesses do not foul with any of the seat’s moveable components (i.e. seat motor drive shafts, etc.).

NOTE

Type 3 and 13 front seats will require seat

memory calibration to reinstate seat memory

functions, refer to Seat Memory Calibration, Front

Seat Type 3 and 13.

9 Switch on the ignition and observe the airbag warning indic ator in the instrument cluster.

• If no fault is detected, the airbag warning indicator illuminates for approximately five seconds while the

system performs a self-test, and then extinguish.

• If a fault is present, the airbag warning indic ator will remain illuminated and a warning chime ma y soun d after

approximately three seconds. The warning message ‘SRS Airbag F ault’ is displayed in the instrument cluster

multi-function display. To diagnose the fault, refer to Section 12M Occupant Protection.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–198

Page 1A7A–198

Seat Memory Calibration, Front Seat Type 3 and 13

Whenever power is interrupted to the seat memory module, the following procedure must be performed to reinstate seat

memory functions.

Step Operation Result

1 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat forward.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

move the seat aft.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat forward.

Seat will cease movement when track limit is

reached.

Seat will move aft.

Seat will cease movement when track limit is

reached.

2 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat aft.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

move the seat forward.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat aft.

Seat will cease movement when track limit is

reached.

Seat will move for ward.

Seat will cease movement when track limit is

reached.

3 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the

front of the seat.

2 Operate the adjustment switch for 1 second to

lower the front of the seat.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the

front of the seat.

Seat will cease movement when upper limit is

reached.

Se at wi ll lo wer .

Seat will cease movement when upper limit is

reached.

4 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the

front of the seat.

2 Operate seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

raise the front of the seat.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the

front of the seat.

Seat will cease movement when lower limit is

reached.

Seat will raise.

Seat will cease movement when lower limit is

reached.

5 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the rear

of the seat.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

lower the rear of the seat.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to raise the rear

of the seat.

Seat will cease movement when upper limit is

reached.

Se at wi ll lo wer .

Seat will cease movement when upper limit is

reached.

6 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the

rear of the seat.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

raise the rear of the seat.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to lower the

rear of the seat.

Seat will cease movement when lower limit is

reached.

Seat will raise.

Seat will cease movement when lower limit is

reached.

7 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

move the seat-back forward.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back aft.

Hold switch until lower limit is reached. This

does not have to be mechanical limit.

Seat-back will move forward.

Hold switch until lower limit is reached. This

should be same position as in 1.

8 1 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

2 Operate the seat adjustment switch for 1 second to

move the seat-back aft.

3 Operate the seat adjustment switch to move the

seat-back forward.

Hold switch until upper lim it is reached. This

does not have to be mechanical limit.

Seat-back will move aft.

Hold switch until upper lim it is reached. This

should be same position as in 1.

9 Press the mirror dip/memory store (M) button for 1

second. Stores the calibration into memory. A three-

tone chime sounds to confirm storage.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–199

Page 1A7A–199

To test if the seat limits have been correctly calibrated, p erform the following:

Step Operation Result

1 Operate the seat adjustment switch in one direction

(fore/aft, raise/lower, etc.). Hold until seat stops.

2 Release the switch briefly. –

3 Operate the switch in the same direction and hold for 3

seconds. The motor will not operate for 2 seconds, then

operates for 0.5 second.

This is a limp-home function that allo ws the

seat to be manually adjusted should a sensor

fail.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–200

Page 1A7A–200

5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembl y

LT Section No. – 14-322

Remove

1 Raise the seat to the full-up position.

2 Remove the screw (1) from the front of the front seat

outer side cover (2).

3 If required, carefully prise the recliner knob (3) from

the seat assembly.

4 Remove the plug (4) by rotating the plug a nti-

clockwise, one quarter of a turn.

5 Remove the screw (5) located behind the plu g.

6 Reach up under the seat assembly and squeeze

together the two retaining tangs (6), on the i nner side

of the side cover while gently pulling the cover.

7 Gently pull the side cover away from the seat to

disengage the two clips (7) attached to the seat-back

frame assembly.

NOTE

Only remove the side cover far enough away

from the seat cushion assembly to gain access

to the seat wiring harness connectors.

Figure 1A7A – 46

8 Where fitted, disconnect the front seat adjustment

switch connector (1), recline motor harness connector

(2) and the memory position switch connector (3) and

unclip the harness from the side cover.

9 Remove the side cover assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 47

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–201

Page 1A7A–201

Disassemble

Front Seat Adjustment Switch

Remove

1 Depending on moveme nt functions, remove the one or

two adjustment knobs (1) from the front seat

adjustment switch (2), by carefully prising them free

with a small flat tip screwdriver wrapped in a clean

shop rag.

Figure 1A7A – 48

2 On four-way and six-way seat s, use a flat-blade

screwdriver to gently prise the front seat adjustment

switch (1) from the outer side cover (2).

Figure 1A7A – 49

3 On eight-way seats, remove the three screws (1)

attaching the front seat adjustment switch (2) to the

front seat outer side cover (3).

4 Remove the adjustment switch.

Figure 1A7A – 50

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat adjustment switch is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 On four-way and six-way seats, ensure the seat adjustment switch is clipped securely in place.

2 On eight-way seats, tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specificatio n.

Front seat adjustment switch

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

3 Push the knobs in until they click in place.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–202

Page 1A7A–202

Memory Position Switch Assembly

Remove

1 Remove the screw (1) two places, attaching the

memory position switch cover (2) to the front seat

outer side cover (3).

2 Lift out the memory position switch assembly (4) from

its recess in the side cover.

3 As required, each position button can b e removed

from the switch.

Figure 1A7A – 51

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the memory position switch assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 If removed, push the position buttons in until they click in place, ensuring correct orientation.

2 Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specification.

Memory position switch cover

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat outer side cover is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specification.

Front seat outer side cover attaching

screw torque specification...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

2 If fitted, ensure the recliner knob is securely clipped in place.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–203

Page 1A7A–203

5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover

LT Section No. – 14-322

As required, remove the front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

Remove

Remove the screw (1) attaching the front seat inner side

cover (2) to the seat assembly (3) and remove the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 52

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat inner side cover is the reverse of the removal procedure, n oting the following:

Tighten the attaching screw to the correct torque specification.

Front seat inner side cover attachi ng

screw torque specification...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–204

Page 1A7A–204

5.6 Front Seat-back Rear Cover Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-322

Remove

The following component will require

replacement when performing this operation.

• Front seat back rear cover retaining clip,

two places.

1 Pull the lower corners of the front seat-back rear cover

(1) away from the seat (2), breaking the two retaining

clips (3).

Figure 1A7A – 53

2 While holding the lower portion of the front seat-back

rear cover (1) out, pull the cover down to release the

upper retaining lug (2), t wo places.

3 Remove the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 54

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–205

Page 1A7A–205

Disassemble

When performing Step 1, take care when

removing the retaining clip (1) not to break

the front seat-back map pocket shafts on

which the reta ining clips are attached.

1 Remove the two retaining clips (1) attaching the front seat-back map pocket (2) to the front seat-back rear cover

(3), refer to Figure 1A7A – 55.

2 Remove the four screws (4) attaching the map pocket to the cover.

3 Remove the map pocket.

Figure 1A7A – 55

Reassemble

Reassembly of the front seat-back rear cover is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specification.

Front seat-back map pocket attaching

screw torque specification...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–206

Page 1A7A–206

Reinstall

1 Replace the damaged retaining clip (1) on the front

seat-back rear cover (2), two places.

Figure 1A7A – 56

2 Align the two upper retaining l ugs (1) with the

seat-back.

3 Push the front seat-back rear cover (2) up and in at

the lower edge to engage the two lower retaining clips.

Figure 1A7A – 57

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–207

Page 1A7A–207

5.7 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-295

Front Seat Type 1, 2 & 5 to 12

Remove

1 Raise the head restraint fully.

2 Insert a suitable size probe into the hole (1) in the right-hand head restraint sleeve (2), refer to F igure 1A7A – 58

3 Push the probe in slightly whil e applying slight upward pressure on the head restraint. Hold the upward pressure.

4 Depress the head restraint sleeve height adjuster lock (3) on the left-hand head restraint sleeve and remove the

head restraint.

Figure 1A7A – 58

Disassemble

1 Disengage the front head restraint cover J-stri p by

pulling the flaps (1) back and out of flaps (2) in the

direction shown.

2 Carefully remove the cover from the pad assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 59

Reassemble

Reassembly of the front seat head restraint assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Ensure the head restraint cover J-clips are fully engaged.

Reinstall

Ensuring correct orientation of the head restraint, fit the head restraint shafts into the sleeves and push the head restraint

down.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–208

Page 1A7A–208

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14

Remove

1 Raise the head restraint fully.

2 Insert a suitable size probe into the hole (1) in the right-hand head restraint sleeve (2), refer to F igure 1A7A – 60

3 Push the probe in slightly whil e applying slight upward pressure on the head restraint. Hold the upward pressure.

4 Depress the head restraint sleeve height adjuster lock (3) on the left-hand head restraint sleeve and raise the head

restraint as high as possible without placing undue strain on the rear seat entertainment lower wiring harness (4).

Figure 1A7A – 60

5 Carefully prise the front of the front head restraint

wiring cover (1) from the head restraint to disengage

the two retaining clips (2), rotating the cover rearward.

6 Detach the six rear retaining l ugs (3) and lower the

cover.

Figure 1A7A – 61

7 From below the head restraint, remove the rear seat

entertainment screen wiring connector (1) by

depressing its locking tab.

NOTE

A fine screwdriver may be needed to depress

the locking tab.

8 Remove the head restraint assembly and front head

restraint wiring cover.

Figure 1A7A – 62

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–209

Page 1A7A–209

Disassemble

1 Remove the two screws (1), attaching the rear seat entertainment head rest escutcheon (2) to the head restraint

assembly, refer to Figure 1A7A – 63.

2 Using a fine, flat-blade screwdriver carefull y locate the retainin g clip (3) along the upper edge. Depress the clip and

detach the escutcheon slightly.

3 Repeat for the opposite retaining clip and remove the escutcheon.

Figure 1A7A – 63

4 Remove the two screws (1), attaching the rear seat

entertainment circuit board (2) to the head restraint

assembly.

5 Disconnect the ribbon wiring (3) from the circuit board.

6 Depress the retaining lug (1), four places, and remove

the rear seat entertainment screen bezel (2), refer to

Figure 1A7A – 65.

Figure 1A7A – 64

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–210

Page 1A7A–210

Figure 1A7A – 65

7 Remove the two screws (1) each side, attaching the rear seat entertai nment screen assembly (2) to the head

restraint assembly, refer to Figure 1A7A – 66.

8 Rotate the top of the screen assembly out, and from behind, carefully disconnect the wiring connector (3).

Figure 1A7A – 66

9 As required, remove the screw (1), four places,

attaching the rear seat entertainment screen (2) to the

mounting plate (3).

10 As required, remove the screw (4), two places,

attaching the pivot hinge (5) to the mounting plate.

11 Repeat for the opposite pivot hinge as re quired.

Figure 1A7A – 67

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–211

Page 1A7A–211

12 Disengage the two J-strips (1) attaching the head

restraint cover to the head restraint frame.

13 Using a fine, flat-blade screwdriver, prise the retaining

strip (2) from the three locking tabs (3) within the head

restraint frame recess.

14 Repeat for the two remaining strips (4).

Figure 1A7A – 68

15 Beginning at the upper corner, fold the head restraint

cover (1) from the head restraint pad (2).

16 Remove the cover (1) from the head restrain t frame

(2), refer to Figure 1A7A – 70.

17 Remove the pad (3) from the frame.

Figure 1A7A – 69

Figure 1A7A – 70

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–212

Page 1A7A–212

Reassemble

Reassembly of the front seat head restraint assembly is the reverse of the disassembly procedure, noting the following:

Tighten the attaching screws to the specifi ed torque.

Rear seat entertainment screen pivot

hinge attaching screw torque

specification................................................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear seat entertainment screen

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear seat entertainment circuit board

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear seat entertainment head rest

escutcheon attaching screw torque

specification................................................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat head restraint assembly is the reverse of the removal proc edure noting the following:

1 Place the front head restraint wiring cover in position on the seat-back, feedin g the r ear seat entertainment lower

wiring harness through the ca vity and ensuring the cover is correctly orientated.

2 Place the head restraint assembly in position in the h ead restraint sleeves, connect the wiring harness and clip the

wiring cover in place.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–213

Page 1A7A–213

5.8 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeve

As required, remove the front seat head restraint assembl y, refer to 5.7 Front Seat Head Restrai nt Assembl y.

LT Section No. – 14-275

Front Seat Type 1, 2 & 5 to 12

Remove

1 Push down on the surrounding seat cover to reveal the

upper portion of the seat-back frame or active head

restraint frame (1).

2 Using a fine flat-blade screwdriver, depress the head

restraint sleeve retaining lug (2) and withdraw the

head restraint sleeve (3) from the frame.

3 Repeat for the remaining sleeve as required.

Figure 1A7A – 71

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat head restraint sleeve is the reverse of the removal proce dure, noting the following:

NOTE

Ensure the sleeve with the height adjuster lock

(1) is installed on the left-hand side of the seat;

that is the side that corresponds to the lower

square notch (2) in the head restraint shaft.

Figure 1A7A – 72

1 Align the head restraint sleeve locatin g ribs (1 ) with

the notch (2) in the seat-back frame.

2 Insert the sleeve and ensure it clicks into place.

Figure 1A7A – 73

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–214

Page 1A7A–214

Front Seat Type 3, 4, 13 & 14

Remove

1 Push down on the surrounding seat cover to reveal the

upper portion of the active head restraint frame (1)

below the front seat head restraint guide cover.

NOTE

If the front seat-back rear cover has

been removed, have an assistant pull on the

active head restraint strap to raise the

sleeves. Do not remove the rear cover

unless necessary as the retaining clips will

break requiring replacement, refer to

5.6 Front Seat-back Rear Cover Assembly.

2 Using a fine flat-blade screwdriver, depress the head

restraint sleeve retaining lug (2) and withdraw the

head restraint sleeve (3) from the frame.

3 Repeat for the remaining sleeve as required.

Figure 1A7A – 74

4 Lift off the front seat head restraint guide cover (1).

Figure 1A7A – 75

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–215

Page 1A7A–215

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat head restraint sleeve is the reverse of the removal proce dure, noting the following:

NOTE

Ensure the sleeve with the height adjuster lock

(1) is installed on the left-hand side of the seat;

that is the side that corresponds to the lower

square notch (2) in the head restraint shaft.

Figure 1A7A – 76

1 Feed the rear seat entertainment lower wiring harness

assembly through the front seat head restraint guide

cover (1) and fit the cover in position.

2 Align the head restraint sleeve locatin g ribs (2 ) with

the notch (3) in the seat-back frame.

3 Insert the sleeve and ensure it clicks into place.

Figure 1A7A – 77

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–216

Page 1A7A–216

5.9 Lumbar Support Knob Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-275

Remove

1 Ensure the lumbar support is in the full off position.

2 Using a fine flat-blade scre w-driver, carefull y prise the

cap (1) from the lumbar support knob (2).

3 Remove the screw (3) attaching the knob to the

lumbar support shaft.

4 Pull the knob off the lumbar support shaft and remove

the lumbar support deflector ring (4).

NOTE

The knob is lightly clipped to the lumbar support

shaft and will ‘click-off’.

Figure 1A7A – 78

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the lumbar s upport knob assembly is the reverse of the removal proced ure, noting the following:

Tighten the attaching screw to the correct torque specification.

Lumbar support knob attachin g

screw torque specification...........................2.0 – 5.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–217

Page 1A7A–217

5.10 Front Seat-back Pad and Cover

Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-295

As required, remove the following compo nents:

1 Front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Front seat outer side cover assembly, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

3 Front seat inner side cover, refer to 5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover.

4 Front seat-back rear cover assembly, refer to 5.6 Front Seat-back Rear Cover Assemb ly.

5 Front seat head restraint assembly, refer to 5.7 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly.

6 Front seat head restraint sleeves, refer to 5.8 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeve.

7 Lumbar support knob assembly, refer to 5.9 Lumbar Suppor t Knob Assembly.

Remove

1 Disengage the J-strips from the seat frame a nd the

Velcro tab at each lower corner.

2 Lift the cover and pad assembly up and away from the

seat-back frame, manoeuvring it over the seat-back

components such as the side impact airbag a nd

dummy block insert assemblies.

Figure 1A7A – 79

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–218

Page 1A7A–218

Disassemble

NOTE

The following illustrations show typical hook and

loop arrangement, which will vary according to

seat type.

Surebond type seat-back cover and pad

assemblies cannot be disassembled.

1 Fold the lower corners of the seat-back cove r (1) over

the seat-back pad (2).

Figure 1A7A – 80

2 While holding the front seat-back pad (1), pull the

lower corners of the seat-back cover (2), upwards and

away from the front seat pad to disengage the hook

and loop strips (3).

3 Pull the front seat-back cover up and over the upper

edge of the front seat-back pad.

Figure 1A7A – 81

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–219

Page 1A7A–219

Reassemble

1 With the seat-back cover (1) folded at the central

horizontal strip of hook and loop (2), align th e centre

mark (3) on the cover with the centre mark (4) on the

front seat-back pad.

2 Press the cover firmly into the corresponding groove i n

the seat-back pad to engage the hook and loop.

Figure 1A7A – 82

3 With the cover folded at the two vertical strips of the

hook and loop, press the cover firml y into the

corresponding grooves in the pad.

Figure 1A7A – 83

4 Roll the upper corners of the cover over the pad.

5 Roll the sides of the cover over the pad.

6 Roll the lower corners of the cover over the pad.

NOTE

Make sure the cover is fitted neatly by hand into

all corners and contours of the seat pad.

Figure 1A7A – 84

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat -back pad and cover assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–220

Page 1A7A–220

5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembl y

When carrying a live (undeployed) side

impact airbag assembly or a front seat-back

frame assembly fitted with a (undeployed)

side impact airbag assembly, ensure the

airbag opening is pointed away from you.

Never carry the side impact airbag assembly

or seat-back frame assembly fitted w ith a side

impact airbag assembly by the airbag wiring

harness or connectors. In case of an

accidental deployment, the airbag will then

deploy with minimal chance of injury.

When placing a live side impact airbag

assembly or a fro nt seat-ba ck frame as sembly

fitted with a (undeployed) side impact airbag

assembly on a bench or other surface, always

face the airbag opening up, away from the

surface. Never rest the airbag assembly or

seat-back frame with the airbag opening face

down. This is necessary so that a free space

is provided to allow the airbag to expand in

the unlikely event of accidental deployment.

Otherwise, personal injury may result.

LT Section No. – 14-275

As required remove the following c ompo nents:

1 Front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Front seat outer side cover assembly, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

3 Front seat inner side cover, refer to 5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover.

Remove

1 Remove the two screws (1), each side, attaching the

seat-back assembly (2) to the front seat cushion frame

assembly (3).

2 As required, disconnect and detach the front seat-back

recline motor, side impact airbag a nd DVD display

wiring harnesses.

3 Remove the seat-back assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 85

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–221

Page 1A7A–221

Disassemble

As required, remove the following compo nents:

1 Front seat-back rear cover assembly, refer to 5.6 Front Seat-back Rear Cover Assemb ly.

2 Front seat head restraint assembly, refer to 5.7 Front Seat Head Restraint Assembly.

3 Front seat head restraint sleeves, refer to 5.8 Front Seat Head Restraint Sleeve.

4 Lumbar support knob assembly, refer to 5.9 Lumbar Suppor t Knob Assembly.

5 Front seat-back pad and cover assembl y, refer to 5.10 Front Seat-back Pad and Cover Assembly.

Side Impact Airbag Assembly

Remove

1 As required, unclip the side im pact airbag wiring

harness (1) from the retaining clip (2) and cut the two

cable ties (3), securing the harness to the front seat

cushion frame assembly, taking care not to damage

the wiring harness.

2 Unclip the wiring harness connector (4) from the track

and height adjust assembly (5).

Figure 1A7A – 86

3 Remove the lock-nut (1), two places, attaching the

side impact airbag assembl y ( 2) to the seat-b ack

frame (3) and airbag assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 87

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the side impact airba g asse mbly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Ensure the conduit covering the wiring harness and the harness are pos itioned correctly, refer to Figure 1A7A – 86.

2 Tighten the attaching nuts to the correct torque specification.

Side impact airbag assembly attaching

nut torque specification...............................5.0 – 6.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–222

Page 1A7A–222

Front Seat Dummy Block Insert Assembly

Remove

1 Remove the lock nut (1), two places, attaching the

front seat dummy block insert (2) to the seat-back

frame (3) and remove the dummy block insert

assembly.

2 If required, remove the dummy block U-bolt (4) from

the dummy block insert.

Figure 1A7A – 88

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat dummy block insert assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the

following:

Tighten the attaching nuts to the correct torque spec ification.

Front seat dummy block insert attaching

nut torque specification...............................5.0 – 6.0 Nm

Lumbar Support Assembly

Remove

1 Remove the retainer (1), two places, attaching the

lumbar support assembly (2) to the seat-back frame.

Figure 1A7A – 89

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–223

Page 1A7A–223

2 Depress the retaining tab (1) and from the inner side

of the seat-back frame, rotate the lumbar support shaft

(2) and withdraw from the seat-back frame.

3 Repeat for the opposite side.

Figure 1A7A – 90

4 Disconnect the spring (1), two places, attaching the

lumbar support assembly (2) to the seat-bac k frame or

active head restraint frame.

TIP

To aid spring remova l, pull the support asse mbly

toward the side that the spring is being remove d

to relieve spring tension.

Figure 1A7A – 91

5 Remove the lumbar support assembly (1).

Figure 1A7A – 92

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the lumbar s upport assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, n oting the following:

Ensure the lumbar support assembl y is correctly seated on the cushion side of the active head restraint frame, where

fitted, with the black lumbar support shaft on the outer side of the seat.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–224

Page 1A7A–224

Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly

Remove

1 Remove the screw (1) and nut (2), two places,

attaching the active head restraint frame assembly (3)

to the seat-back frame hinge.

Figure 1A7A – 93

2 Withdraw the active head restraint frame assembly (1)

downward to remove it from the seat-back frame and

remove.

Figure 1A7A – 94

3 If required, slide the support strap (1) from the active

head restraint frame.

Figure 1A7A – 95

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–225

Page 1A7A–225

4 If required, depress the tab (1), two places, and

withdraw the active head restraint frame sleeve (2)

from the seat-back frame.

5 Repeat for the opposite sleeve as requ ired.

Figure 1A7A – 96

6 If required, remove the spring (1), from the active head

restraint frame hinge and seat-back frame.

7 Repeat for the opposite side as required.

Figure 1A7A – 97

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the active head restraint frame assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Tighten the attaching nuts to the correct torque spec ification.

Active head restraint frame assembly

attaching nut torque specification................3.0 – 5.0 Nm

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat-back frame assembly is the reverse of the removal proced ure, noting the following:

1 Tighten the attaching screws to the correct torque specific ation.

Front seat-back frame assembly

attaching screw torque specification.......30.0 – 45.0 Nm

2 Check the mechanical and ele c trical operation of the front seat.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–226

Page 1A7A–226

5.12 Seat Cable Tray and Memory Module

Remove

1 Remove the front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Remove the seat track and height adjust assembly, refer to 5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly.

3 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors as required.

4 Unclip the cable tray from the front of the seat track

and height adjust assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 98

5 Pull the cable tray forward to release it from the seat

track and height adjust assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 99

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–227

Page 1A7A–227

6 If required, use a 5 mm drill bit and dri ll out the pop

rivet (1), two places, securing the seat memor y

module to the cable tray.

7 Remove the seat memory module.

Figure 1A7A – 100

8 If required, remove the wiring harness from the cable

tray by squeezing the tabs on the harness clips (1)

and by removing the tape (2).

Figure 1A7A – 101

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the seat memor y module is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Ensure the wiring harness an d connectors are correctly routed and attached securely.

2 Use new pop rivets.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–228

Page 1A7A–228

5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly

The track and height adjust assembly

components are non-serviceable. If the track

and height adjust assembly, drive motors or

drive shafts require replacement, the entire

track and height adjust assembly must be

replaced.

LT Section No. – 14-275

As required, remove the following compo nents:

1 Front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Front seat outer side cover assembly, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

Remove

1 As required, detach the wiring harness con nectors.

2 As required, detach the seatbelt pretensioner and side airbag wiring harnesses.

3 Remove the four nuts (1) attaching the track and

height adjust assembly (2) to the seat.

4 Remove the track and height adjust assembly.

5 If required, remove the cable tray and

wiring harness assembly, refer to

5.12 Seat Cable Tray and Memory Module.

6 If required, remove the seatbelt buckle

and pretensioner assembl y, refer to

Section 12M Occupant Protection System.

Figure 1A7A – 102

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the track and height adjust assembly is the reverse of the removal procedur e, noting the following:

1 Ensure the connectors are correctly routed and attached securely.

2 Tighten the attaching nuts to the correct torque spec ification.

Track and height adjust asse mbly

attaching nut torque specification............24.0 – 32.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–229

Page 1A7A–229

5.14 Front Seat Cushion Pad and Cover

Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-295

As required, remove the following compo nents:

1 Front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Front seat outer side cover assembly, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

3 Front seat inner side cover, refer to 5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover.

4 Front seat-back frame assembly, refer to 5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly.

Remove

1 From under the front seat cushion, disengage the front

and side J-strips (1) away from the seat frame (2).

2 Lift the cover and pad assembly a way from the seat

frame and then release the rear J-strip (3).

3 Remove the cover and pad assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 103

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–230

Page 1A7A–230

Disassemble

NOTE

The following illustrations show typical hook and

loop arrangement, which will vary according to

seat type.

Surebond type seat-back cover and pad

assemblies cannot be disassembled.

1 Fold the rear corners of the front seat cushion cover

(1) over the seat cushion pad (2).

Figure 1A7A – 104

2 While holding the front seat cushi on pad (1), pull the

rear corners of the seat cushion cover (2) forward and

away from the pad to disengage the hook and loop

strips (3).

3 Pull the cover up and over the forward edge of the

pad.

Figure 1A7A – 105

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–231

Page 1A7A–231

Reassemble

1 Align either of the outer hook and l oo p strips (1) and

the one or two cross hook and loop strips (2), on the

seat cushion cover (3), with the seat cushion pad (4).

2 Press the folded edge of the rear seat cushion cover

firmly into the corresponding groove in the seat

cushion pad to engage the hook and loop strip.

Figure 1A7A – 106

3 Align and press the outer hook and loop strip (1), on

the cover (2), with the corresponding groove in the p ad

(3).

Figure 1A7A – 107

4 Roll the front corners of the cover over the pad.

5 Roll the sides of the cover over the pad.

6 Roll the rear corners of the cover over the pad.

NOTE

Make sure the pad is fitted neatly by hand into all

corners and contours of the seat cover.

Do not pull the cover onto the pad from

underneath using the J-strip to make it fit

neatly, as the fabric may be damaged.

Figure 1A7A – 108

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat cushion pad and cover assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–232

Page 1A7A–232

5.15 Front Seat Cushion Frame Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-275

Remove

As required, remove the following compo nents:

1 Front seat assembly, refer to 5.3 Front Seat Assembly.

2 Front seat outer side cover assembly, refer to 5.4 Front Seat Outer Side Cover Assembly.

3 Front seat inner side cover, refer to 5.5 Front Seat Inner Side Cover.

4 Front seat-back frame assembly, refer to 5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly.

5 Track and height adjust assembly, refer to 5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly.

6 Front seat cushion pad and cover assembly, refer to 5.14 Front Seat Cushion Pad and Cover Assembly.

Disassemble

1 To remove the suspension mat (1), modify a G-clamp

with a 5 mm diameter metal dowel (2) welded to one

end and another appro ximately 40 mm long and with a

2 mm diameter pin (3) approximately 20 mm l ong

welded to the other end.

2 Using the G-clamp, stretch the suspension mat far

enough to allow for the retaining springs (4) to be

removed from the seat cushion frame.

3 Back the G-clamp load off and remove the suspensio n

mat.

When using the G-clamp, use existing holes

in the suspension mat to ensure mat

deformation does not occur.

Figure 1A7A – 109

Reassemble

Reassembly of the suspension mat is the reverse of the disassembl y proc edure.

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the front seat cushion frame assembly is the reverse of the removal proc edure, noting the following:

1 Ensure all wiring is correctly connected and routed, refer to Section 12O, Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses.

2 Check the mechanical and ele c trical operation of the front seat.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–233

Page 1A7A–233

5.16 Front Seat Lift Motor Assemblies

The front seat lift motor assemblies are non-serviceabl e items.

If a front seat lift motor assembly requires replacement, the track and height adjust assembly must be replaced,

refer to 5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–234

Page 1A7A–234

5.17 Front Seat Fore/Aft Movement Motor

Assembly

The front seat fore/aft movement motor assembl y is a non-serviceable item.

If the front seat fore/aft movement motor or drive shafts require replacement, the track and height adjus t assembly must

be replaced, refer to 5.13 Track and Height Adjust Assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–235

Page 1A7A–235

5.18 Front Seat-back Recline Motor Assembly

The front seat-back recline motor assembly is a non-serviceable item.

If the front seat-back recline motor assembly requires replacement, the fron t seat-back frame assembly must be

replaced, refer to 5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–236

Page 1A7A–236

5.19 Drive Motor Hall-effect Sensors

The front seat drive motor hall-effect sensors are non-serviceable items.

If the front seat fore/aft movement and/or front seat lift motor hall-effect sensors require replacement, the track and

height adjust assembly must be replaced, refer to 5.13 Track and Heig ht Adjust Assembly.

If the seat-back recline motor hall-effect sensor requires replacement, the front seat-back frame assem bl y must be

replaced, refer to 5.11 Front Seat-back Frame Assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–237

Page 1A7A–237

6 Service Operations – Rear Seat

6.1 Usage Chart

How To Use This Chart

The following usage chart is provided to help determine the rear seat type fitted to the vehicle. T his is important prior to

repairs being performed as the failed/damaged part may no t be serviced.

To determine the seat type fitted to the vehicle, obtain th e vehicle model and the seat fabric t ype. Establish if the vehicl e

has an armrest and/or headrest. Using the chart will lead to the elimination of all other seat combinations, allowing for the

identification of the type and t he construction of the seat. Refer to the Figure shown in the Rear Seat T ype column for a

component breakdown of the rear seat assembly.

1 Vehicle – Vehicle mod el identification.

2 Fabric – Cloth or Leather seat covers.

3 Armrest with Compartment. – If the rear seat-back assembly is fitted with an armrest which incorporates a

convenience compartment.

4 Head Restraint – If the rear seat-back is fitted with a headrest.

5 Centre Head Restraint – If the rear seat is fitted with a centre headrest.

6 Construction – Surebond refers to the seat cover being glued to the seat pad. This type is serviced as a cover and

pad assembly only. Hook an d Loop refers to the seat cover being attached to the seat pa d with a Velcro type

material and both being servi c ed as separate parts. Conventional Pull-down refers to the seat cover being attached

to the pad and frame with a retainer wire and hog rings, with all parts being serviced.

7 Rear Seat Type – Identifies the seat type and provides reference to illustrations which show a breakdown of the

serviced component for each rear seat assembly.

Domestic

Vehicle Fabric Armrest

(With

Compartment)

Head

Restraint Centre Head

Restraint Construction Rear Seat Type

(Refer to)

Statesman

– Level 4 Cloth Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 1

(Figure 1A7A – 110)

Statesman

– Level 4 Leather Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 2

(Figure 1A7A – 111)

Caprice

– Level 5

Two

Passenger

Rear Seat

Leather Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 3

(Figure 1A7A – 112)

Caprice

– Level 5

Three

Passenger

Rear Seat

Leather Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 4

(Figure 1A7A – 113)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–238

Page 1A7A–238

Gulf States

Vehicle Fabric Armrest

(With

Compartment)

Head

Restraint Centre head

Restraint Construction Rear Seat Type

(Refer to)

Caprice

– Level 1

Cloth No No No Surebond 5

(Figure 1A7A – 114)

Caprice

LTZ

– Level 2

Cloth No Yes No Conventional

Pull-down 6

(Figure 1A7A – 115)

Caprice

LTZ

– Level 2

Leather No Yes No Conventional

Pull-down 7

(Figure 1A7A – 116)

Caprice

– Level 3

Leather No Yes Yes Hook and Loop 8

(Figure 1A7A – 117)

Caprice

Royale

– Level 5

Two

Passenger

Rear Seat

Leather Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 3

(Figure 1A7A – 112)

Caprice

Royale

– Level 5

Three

Passenger

Rear Seat

Leather Yes Yes Yes Conventional

Pull-down 4

(Figure 1A7A – 113)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–239

Page 1A7A–239

Rear Seat Type 1

Figure 1A7A – 110

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–240

Page 1A7A–240

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat-back Cover Retainer Wire

6 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

7 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

8 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

9 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

10 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

11 Hog Ring

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

15 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

16 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

17 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

18 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Cover

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Sleeves

20 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire

21 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire – Left-hand

22 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire – Right-hand

23 Rear Seat-back Vertical Groove Retainer Wire

24 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

25 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Centre Retainer Wire (4 Places)

26 Rear Seat Cushion Front Retainer Wire (2 Places)

27 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Inner Retainer Wire (2 Places)

28 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Cover

29 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Pad

30 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Sleeves

∗ Refer to Figure 1A7A – 119 for a breakdown of the rear seat-back centre tray and armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–241

Page 1A7A–241

Rear Seat Type 2

Figure 1A7A – 111

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–242

Page 1A7A–242

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat-back Cover Retainer Wire

6 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

7 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

8 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

9 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

10 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

11 Hog Ring

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

15 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

16 Release Button Rod

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

18 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

20 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Cover

21 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Sleeves

22 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire

23 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire

24 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire

25 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire

26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

27 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Front Retainer Wire (2 Places)

28 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Inner Retainer Wire (2 Places)

29 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Cover

30 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Pad

31 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Sleeves

∗ Refer to Figure 1A7A – 119 for a breakdown of the rear seat-back centre tray and armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–243

Page 1A7A–243

Rear Seat Type 3

Figure 1A7A – 112

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–244

Page 1A7A–244

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

6 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

7 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

8 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

9 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

10 Hog Ring

11 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

15 Release Button Rod

16 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

18 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Cover

20 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Sleeves

21 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Pad

22 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Cover

23 Centre Head Restraint Sleeves

24 Rear Seat-back Inner Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire

25 Rear Seat-back Outer Groove Retainer Wire

26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

27 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Inner Retainer Wire (2 Places)

28 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Front Retainer Wire (2 Places)

29 Rear Seat-back Cushion Head Restraint Retainer Wire

∗ Refer to Figure 1A7A – 119 for a breakdown of the rear seat-back centre tray and armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–245

Page 1A7A–245

Rear Seat Type 4

Figure 1A7A – 113

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–246

Page 1A7A–246

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

6 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

7 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

8 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

9 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

10 Hog Ring

11 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

15 Release Button Rod

16 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

18 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Cover

20 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Sleeves

21 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Pad Assembly

22 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Cover

23 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Sleeves

24 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

25 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Inner Retainer Wire (2 Places)

26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Front Retainer Wire (4 Places)

27 Rear Seat-back Outer Groove Retainer Wire

28 Rear Seat-back Cushion Inner Horizontal Groove Retainer

Wire

29 Rear Seat-back Cushion Head Restraint Retainer Wire

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 119 for a breakdo wn of the rear seat-back centre tray and armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–247

Page 1A7A–247

Rear Seat Type 5

Figure 1A7A – 114

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Assembly – Left-hand

3 Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Assembly

4 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

5 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

6 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Wire Retainer

7 Hog Ring

8 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

9 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

10 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

11 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

12 Release Button Rod

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 118 for a breakdo wn of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–248

Page 1A7A–248

Rear Seat Type 6

Figure 1A7A – 115

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–249

Page 1A7A–249

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover Assembly – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover Assembly – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat-back Cover Retainer Wire

6 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

7 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

8 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

9 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

10 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

11 Hog Ring

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

15 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

16 Release Button Rod

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

18 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

20 Head Restraint Cover

21 Head Restraint Sleeves

22 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire

23 Rear Seat-back Outer Groove Retainer Wire

24 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wires

25 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Centre Retainer Wire (4 Places)

27 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Front Retainer Wire (2 Places)

28 Rear Seat Cushion Inner Retaining Wire (2 Places)

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 118 for a breakdown of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–250

Page 1A7A–250

Rear Seat Type 7

Figure 1A7A – 116

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–251

Page 1A7A–251

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat-back Cover Retainer Wire

6 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

7 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

8 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

9 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

10 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

11 Hog Ring

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

15 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

16 Release Button Rod

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

18 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

20 Head Restraint Cover

21 Head Restraint Sleeves

22 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire –

Right-hand

23 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire – Right-hand

24 Rear Seat-back Upper Horizontal Groove Retainer Wire –

Left-hand

25 Rear Seat-back Outer Retainer Wire – Left-hand

26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Outer Retainer Wire (2 Places)

27 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Front Retainer Wire (2 Places)

28 Rear Seat Cushion Inner Retaining Wire (2 Places)

∗ Refer to Figure 1A7A – 118 for a breakdown of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–252

Page 1A7A–252

Rear Seat Type 8

Figure 1A7A – 117

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–253

Page 1A7A–253

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Right-hand

2 Rear Seat-back Cover – Right-hand

3 Rear Seat-back Pad and Frame Assembly – Left-hand

4 Rear Seat-back Cover – Left-hand

5 Rear Seat Cushion Pad

6 Rear Seat Cushion Cover

7 Rear Seat Cushion Frame

8 Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle (2 Places)

9 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Retainer Wire

10 Hog Ring

11 Rear Seat-back Centre Cover

12 Rear Seat-back Centre Pad

13 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly ∗

14 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

15 Release Button Rod

16 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

17 Rear Seat-back Centre Striker Cover

18 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Pad Assembly

19 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Cover

20 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Sleeves

21 Rear Seat-back Head Centre Head Restraint Pad Assembly

22 Rear Seat-back Head Centre Head Restraint Cover

23 Rear Seat-back Head Centre Head Restraint Sleeves

* Refer to Figure 1A7A – 118 for a breakdo wn of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–254

Page 1A7A–254

Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly without Compartment

Figure 1A7A – 118

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray

2 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray Hinge

3 Hinge Rear Seat-back Centre Bolt (4 Places)

4 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

5 Release Button Rod

6 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Actuator

7 Lock Actuator Bolt (2 Places)

8 Centre Armrest Cover

9 Centre Armrest Pad

10 Centre Armrest Assembly Hinge

11 Centre Armrest Hinge Bolt (4 Places)

12 Centre Armrest Hinge Screw (4 Places)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–255

Page 1A7A–255

Rear Seat-back Centre Tray and Armrest Assembly with Compartment

Figure 1A7A – 119

Legend

1 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray

2 Rear Seat-back Centre Tray Hinge

3 Rear Seat-back Centre Hinge Bolt (4 Places)

4 Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

5 Release Button Rod

6 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Actuator

7 Lock Actuator Bolt (2 Places)

8 Centre Armrest Cover

9 Centre Armrest Pad

10 Centre Armrest Lid Cover

11 Centre Armrest Lid

12 Centre Armrest Lid Hinge

13 Centre Armrest Lid Hinge Screw (6 Places)

14 Centre Armrest Deposit Box

15 Centre Armrest Cup Holder

16 Centre Armrest Cup Holder Housing

17 Centre Armrest Cup Holder Housing Screw (4 Places)

18 Centre Armrest Assembly Hinge

19 Centre Armrest Hinge Screw (6 Places)

20 Centre Armrest Lid Latch

21 Centre Armrest Lid Latch Screw (2 Places)

22 Centre Armrest Assembly Hinge Bolt (4 Places)

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–256

Page 1A7A–256

6.2 Rear Seat Cushion Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-330

Remove

NOTE

If fitted with a DVD, use care when removing the

rear seat cushion to avoid damage to the DVD

control panel cover located under the rear seat

cushion.

1 Lift the front of the rear seat cushion assembly (1)

slightly, to gain access to the rear seat cushion

release handles (2).

2 From either the left or the right side of the seat, pull

the release handle T-piece horizontally forwards, while

at the same time lifting the front of the rear seat

cushion until the lock mechanism is released.

3 Repeat step 2 for the opposite side of the seat.

4 Remove the rear seat cushion assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 120

Disassemble

Rear Seat Cushion Release Handle

Remove

1 Remove the rear seat cushion release handle (1) by

inserting a screwdriver (2) to disengage the retaining

lugs.

2 Slide the release handl e off the rear seat cushion wire

frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 121

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–257

Page 1A7A–257

Reinstall

Slide the rear seat cushion rel ease handle (1) onto the rear

seat cushion wire frame (2) and close the cover so that it will

lock into position on the frame.

Figure 1A7A – 122

Rear Seat Cushion Frame

Remove

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

1 With the rear seat cushion assembly upside down,

follow the procedures below for the appropriate rear

seat type assembly.

a For rear seat Types 3 and 4, unclip the three

retainers (1) attaching the rear seat cushio n

cover (2) to the rear seat cushion frame (3).

b For other rear seat Types, proceed to step 2.

Figure 1A7A – 123

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–258

Page 1A7A–258

2 Use bolt cutters or side cutters (1) to remove the hog

rings (2) attaching the cover and pad assem bly (3) to

the frame (4).

• 51 places for the Surebond rear seat Type 5

cushion.

• 54 places for the hook and loop rear seat Type 8

cushion.

• 59 places for the conventional Pull-down rear

seat cushion, all other Types.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog

rings not to damage the cushion cover. All hog

rings will be destroyed during this operation and

must be replaced.

3 Remove the frame from the rear seat cushion

assembly. Figure 1A7A – 124

4 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3),

refer, View A only for rear seat Types 1, 2 & 5 to 8 and

Views A and B for rear seat Types 3 and 4.

NOTE

For rear seat Types 3 and 4, the retaini ng wire is

in two pieces with the break in the wire across

the front of the seat.

Figure 1A7A – 125

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–259

Page 1A7A–259

Reinstall

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when working with hog rings.

NOTE

All hog rings must be replaced when reinstalling

the rear seat cushion frame.

Using the following sequence of operations, align the rear

seat cushion cover and pad assembly (1) to the rear seat

cushion frame (2) and attach the hog rin gs (3 ).

• 51 places for the Surebond rear seat cush ion,

rear seat Type 5.

• 54 places for the hook and loop rear seat cushion,

rear seat Type 8.

• 59 places for the conventional pull down rear seat

cushion, all other rear seat Types.

Figure 1A7A – 126

NOTE

For rear seat Types 3 and 4, the rear seat

cushion cover retaining wire is a two-piece wire.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–260

Page 1A7A–260

1 Starting at the front, centre of the rear seat cushion cover assembly (1), attach the wire retainer (2) with the

appropriate number of hog rings (3), refer to F igure 1A7A – 127.

a Three places for rear seat Types 1, 2 & 5 to 8, View A.

b Four places for rear seat Types 3 and 4, View B, each side.

Figure 1A7A – 127

2 Working from the centre outward, attach the wire

retainer (1), while pulling the cover assembly (2) tight

and attach with four hog rings (3).

3 Repeat this process in the opposite direction working

from the centre outward.

Figure 1A7A – 128

4 Continue attaching the cover assemb ly (1) to the

frame (2), by pulling the cover tight and attach with

seven hog rings (3).

5 Repeat this process in the opposite direction.

Figure 1A7A – 129

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–261

Page 1A7A–261

6 Pull the rear of the cover assembly (1) tight and attach

the centre with four hog rings (2) to the centre of the

wire frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 130

7 Pull the cushion cover assembl y (1) tight into the

seatbelt slot at the rear and attach with four hog rings

(2) to the wire frame (3).

8 Repeat this process for the opposite seatbelt slot.

Figure 1A7A – 131

9 Working outward from the seatbelt slot, continue

attaching the cover assembly (1) to the frame (2), by

pulling the cover tight and attach with four hog rings

(3).

10 Repeat this process in the opposite dir ection.

Figure 1A7A – 132

11 At the rear corner continue attaching the cover

assembly (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover

tight, up and around the corner and attach with six hog

rings (3).

12 Repeat this process for the opposite cor ner.

NOTE

The cover should be smooth and without

creases. If this is not the case, extra hog rings

should be used to pull the cover into place.

Figure 1A7A – 133

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–262

Page 1A7A–262

13 For rear seat Types 3 and 4, reinstall the three

retainers (1) attaching the rear seat cushio n cover (2)

to the rear seat cushion frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 134

Cushion Cover Assembly

Rear Seat Type 1 and 6

Remove

The cloth rear seat cushion cover for the rea r seat Type 1 and 6 cushion pad (1) is attached with approximately 34 hog

rings (2), in the locations shown, refer to Figure 1A7A – 135.

Figure 1A7A – 135

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–263

Page 1A7A–263

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog rings

not to damage the cushion cover. All hog rings

will be destroyed during this operation and must

be replaced.

Using the following sequenc e of operations, cut the hog rings as they are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters.

1 If required, remove the rear seat cushion frame, refer to Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

2 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 136

3 Fold the rear corner of the rear seat cushion cover (1)

over the seat cushion pad (2), then fold the front

corner of the cover up.

Figure 1A7A – 137

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–264

Page 1A7A–264

4 From the outer edge, continue to fold the cushion

cover (1) back while holding the cushion pad (2)

revealing the four hog rings (3) attaching th e outer

retaining wire to the pad and cut the hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 138

5 Working towards the centre of the seat cushion,

carefully fold back the cover (1) revealing the hog

rings (2) attaching the inner and front retaining wires to

the pad. Cut these and continue folding the cover back

until all hog rings in the correspondin g grooves (3)

have been removed.

Figure 1A7A – 139

6 Continue to fold the cushion (1) over towards the

centre and from the front of the rear seat cushion (2).

Cut the three hog rings (3) attaching the inner

retaining wire to the pad.

7 Repeat the process for the centre groove.

8 Repeat the process for the other side of the rear seat

cushion.

9 Remove the cushion cover from the cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 140

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–265

Page 1A7A–265

NOTE

The cushion cover has ten retaining wires that

align the cushion cover to the cushion pad and

are used to hook the hog rings to. These will

need to be removed from the cover if it is to be

replaced.

10 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) and repeat for the remaining nine places.

Figure 1A7A – 141

Reinstall

Referring to Figure 1A7A – 135 showing the hog ring locations, reinstall the rear seat cus hion cover using the following

sequence of operations, attachin g the hog rings with hog ring pliers.

1 If required, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the casing (2), ten places, in the cushion cover assembl y, refer to

Figure 1A7A – 141.

2 Beginning on one side of the cushion, position the

cover (1) into the inner corresponding groove.

NOTE

Ensure the cushion cover aligns to all the

grooves in the cushion pad before attaching the

cover with hog rings.

3 Starting at the rear and working towards the front,

attach hog rings (2), four places, using hog ri ng pliers.

Figure 1A7A – 142

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–266

Page 1A7A–266

4 Continue working towards the outside e dg e of the

cushion, fold the cushion cover (1) into the centre

corresponding groove (2) an d attach the cover with

three hog rings (3).

5 Repeat for the other centre corresponding groove.

6 Position the cover into the front corresponding cushion

groove and attach with three hog rings usi ng the same

method as for the centre grooves.

Figure 1A7A – 143

7 Working along the side of the rear seat cush ion,

position the cover (1) into the outer correspo nding

groove and attach four hog rings (2).

8 Repeat the process for the opposite side of the rear

seat cushion cover.

Figure 1A7A – 144

9 Fold the rear seat cushion cover (1) over the corners

of the cushion pad (2).

10 Pull the rear seat cushion cover up over th e rear seat

cushion ensuring that the cushion cover is fitted neatly

into all corners and contours of the rear seat cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 145

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–267

Page 1A7A–267

11 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

12 Refit the rear seat cushion frame, refer to

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

Figure 1A7A – 146

Rear Seat Type 2 and 7

Remove

The leather rear seat cushion cover for rear s eat Types 2 and 7 cushion pad (1) is, attached to the cushion with

approximately 28 hog rings (2) in the locations shown, refer to Figure 1A7A – 147.

Figure 1A7A – 147

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–268

Page 1A7A–268

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog rings

not to damage the cushion cover. All hog rings

will be destroyed during this operation and must

be replaced.

Using the following sequenc e of operations, cut the hog rings as they are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters.

1 If required, remove the rear seat cushion frame, refer to Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

2 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 148

3 Pull the rear corner of the rear seat cushion cover (1)

over the seat cushion pad (2) and the n pull the front

corner of the cover up.

Figure 1A7A – 149

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–269

Page 1A7A–269

4 Fold the cushion cover (1) towards the centre of the

cushion while holding the cushion pad (2) revealing

the four hog rings (3) and cut to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 150

5 Working towards the centre of the rear seat cushion,

carefully fold back the cover (1) revealing the outer

hog ring (2), cut this and continue folding the cover

back until all hog rings in the corresponding groove (3)

have been removed.

Figure 1A7A – 151

6 Continue to fold the cushion over towards the centre

and from the rear of the seat cushion, cut the hog

rings (2), four places, while working towards the front.

7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the other side of the rear seat

cushion.

8 Remove the cushion cover from the cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 152

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–270

Page 1A7A–270

NOTE

The cushion cover has six retaining wires that

align to the grooves in the cushion pad and are

used to hook the hog rings to. These will need to

be removed from the cover if it is to be replaced.

9 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) and repeat for the remaining five places.

Figure 1A7A – 153

Reinstall

Referring to Figure 1A7A – 147 showing the hog ring locations, install the rear seat cushion cover using the following

sequence of operations, attachin g the hog rings with hog ring pliers.

1 If required, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the casing (2), six places, in the cushion cover assembly, refer to

Figure 1A7A – 153.

2 Beginning on one side of the cushion, position the

cover (1) into the inner corresponding groove. Starting

at the rear and working towards the front, attach with

hog rings (2), four places, using hog ring pli ers.

NOTE

Ensure the cushion cover aligns to all the

grooves in the cushion pad before attaching the

cover with hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 154

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–271

Page 1A7A–271

3 Continue to fold the cushion cover (1) into the front

and outer corresponding groov e (2) of the seat and

working around to the corner, attach the cover with

hog rings (3), four places.

Figure 1A7A – 155

4 Working along the outer edge of the rear seat cushion,

position the cover (1) into the corresponding

groove (2) and attach with four hog rings (3).

5 Repeat the process for the opposite side of the rear

seat cushion cover.

Figure 1A7A – 156

6 Fold the rear seat cushion cover (1) over the corners

of the cushion pad (2) ensuring it is fitted nea tly into all

corners and contours of the rear seat cushion.

NOTE

As part of their designed appearance, Leather

cushion covers have inherent minor creases in

the material.

Figure 1A7A – 157

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–272

Page 1A7A–272

7 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

8 Refit the rear seat cushion frame, refer to

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

Figure 1A7A – 158

Rear Seat Type 3

Remove

The rear seat cushion cover (1) for rear seat Type 3 is attached to the cushion with approximatel y 40 hog rings in the

locations shown (2), refer to Figure 1A7A – 159.

Figure 1A7A – 159

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–273

Page 1A7A–273

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog rings

not to damage the cushion cover. All hog rings

will be destroyed during this operation and must

be replaced.

Using the following sequenc e of operations, cut the hog rings as they are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters.

1 If required, remove the rear seat cushion frame, refer to Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

2 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

NOTE

The rear seat Type 3 retaining wire is in two

pieces with the break in the wire across the front

of the seat above the transmission tunnel.

Figure 1A7A – 160

3 Fold the rear corner of the rear seat cushion cover (1)

over the seat cushion pad (2), then fold the front

corner of the cover up revealing the hog ring (3).

Figure 1A7A – 161

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–274

Page 1A7A–274

4 Fold the cushion cover (1) back while holding the

cushion pad (2) revealing the four hog rings (3) and

cut to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 162

5 Working towards the centre of the seat cushion,

carefully fold back the cover (1) revealing two outer

hog rings (2), cut these and continue folding the cover

back until all hog rings in each corresp onding groove

(3) have been removed.

Figure 1A7A – 163

6 Fold the front of the cushion cover (1) back revealing

the hog ring (2) taking care not to damage the cushion

cover tag (3) or the cover and remove the hog ring.

Figure 1A7A – 164

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–275

Page 1A7A–275

7 Continue to fold the cushion over towards the centre

and from the rear of the seat cushion, cut the hog

rings (2), four places, while working towards the front.

8 Continue to fold the cushion cover back towards the

centre and repeat the process for the centre groove.

9 Repeat the process for the other side of the rear seat

cushion.

10 Remove the cushion cover from the cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 165

NOTE

The cushion cover has six retaining wires that

align to the grooves in the cushion pad and are

used to hook the hog rings to. These will need to

be removed from the cover if it is to be replaced.

11 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) and repeat for the remaining five places.

Figure 1A7A – 166

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–276

Page 1A7A–276

Reinstall

Referring to Figure 1A7A – 159 showing the hog ring locations, install the rear seat cushion cover using the following

sequence of operations, attachin g the hog rings with hog ring pliers.

1 If required, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the casing (2) in six locations in the cushion cover assembly, refer to

Figure 1A7A – 166.

2 Beginning on one side of the rear seat cush ion (1)

position the cover (2) into the centre corresponding

groove. Starting at the rear and working to wards the

front, attach with four hog rings using hog ring pliers.

NOTE

Ensure the cushion cover aligns to all the

grooves in the cushion pad before attaching the

cover with hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 167

3 Working outward, start from the front of the cushion,

fold the cushion cover (1) over the front and attach the

hog ring (2).

Figure 1A7A – 168

4 Fold the cushion cover (1) into the corresponding

groove and from the front of the seat and working

around to the rear, attach the cover with hog rings (2),

four places.

Figure 1A7A – 169

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–277

Page 1A7A–277

5 From the centre of the cushion, position the cover (1)

into the corresponding grooves (2) and attach with six

hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 170

6 At the front of the rear seat cushion pad (1), fold the

cushion cover (2) over the top and attach the hog ring

(3).

Figure 1A7A – 171

7 Working along the side of the rear seat cush ion,

position the cover (1) into the corresponding

groove (2) and attach with four hog rings (3).

8 Repeat the process for the opposite side of the rear

seat cushion cover. NOTE

As part of their designed appearance, Leather

cushion covers have inherent minor creases in

the material.

Figure 1A7A – 172

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–278

Page 1A7A–278

9 Fold the rear seat cushion cover (1) over the corners

of the cushion ensuring the cushion cover is fitted

neatly into all corners and contours of the rear seat

cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 173

10 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

NOTE

The rear seat Type 3 retaining wire is in two

pieces with the break in the wire across the front

of the seat above the transmission tunnel.

11 Refit the rear seat cushion frame, refer to

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

Figure 1A7A – 174

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–279

Page 1A7A–279

Rear Seat Type 4

Remove

The rear seat cushion cover (1) for rear seat Type 4 is attached to the cushion with approximately 28 hog rings (2) in the

locations shown, refer to Figure 1A7A – 175.

Figure 1A7A – 175

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog rings

not to damage the cushion cover. All hog rings

will be destroyed during this operation and must

be replaced.

Using the following sequence of operations, cut all hog rings as the y are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters.

1 If required, remove the rear seat cushion frame, refer to Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

2 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

NOTE

The rear seat Type 4 retaining wire is in two

pieces with the break in the wire across the front

of the seat above the transmission tunnel cut-

out.

Figure 1A7A – 176

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–280

Page 1A7A–280

3 Fold the rear corner of the rear seat cushion cover (1),

up over the rear seat cushion pad (2) then, fold the

front corner of the cover up.

Figure 1A7A – 177

4 Fold the cushion cover (1) back towards the centre of

the seat cushion while holding the cushion pad (2) to

reveal the four hog rings (3) and cut to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 178

5 Continue working towards the centre of the seat

cushion, carefully fold back the cover (1) revealing two

outer hog rings (2), cut these and continue folding the

cover back until all hog rings in each corresponding

groove (3) have been removed.

Figure 1A7A – 179

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–281

Page 1A7A–281

6 Fold the cushion (1) over towards the centre and from

the front of the seat cushion, cut the hog rings (2), four

places.

7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the other side of the rear seat

cushion and remove the cushion cover from the

cushion.

Figure 1A7A – 180

NOTE

The cushion cover has eight retaining wires that

align to the grooves in the cushion pad and are

used to hook the hog rings to. These will need to

be removed from the cover if it is to be replaced.

8 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) and repeat for the remaining seve n places.

Figure 1A7A – 181

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–282

Page 1A7A–282

Reinstall

Referring to Figure 1A7A – 175 showing the hog ring locations, install the rear seat cushion cover using the following

sequence of operations, attachin g the hog rings with hog ring pliers.

If required, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the casing (2) in eight locations in the cushion cover assembl y, refer to

Figure 1A7A – 181.

1 Beginning on one side of the cushion, position the

cover (1) into the inner corresponding groove. Starting

at the rear and working towards the front, attach the

cushion cover to the cushion pad with hog rings (2),

four places, using hog ring pliers.

NOTE

Ensure the cushion cover aligns to all the

grooves in the cushion pad before attaching the

cover with hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 182

2 Working outward, position the cushio n cover (1), into

the corresponding grooves (2) and attach with hog

rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 183

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–283

Page 1A7A–283

3 Working along the outside edge of the rear seat

cushion, position the cover (1) into the outer

corresponding groove (2) an d attach with four hog

rings (3).

4 Repeat the process for the opposite side of the rear

seat cushion cover.

Figure 1A7A – 184

5 Fold the rear seat cushion cover (1) over the corners

of the cushion pad (2), ensuri ng that the cushion cover

is fitted neatly into all corners and contours of the rear

seat cushion.

NOTE

As part of their designed appearance, Leather

cushion covers have inherent minor creases in

the material.

Figure 1A7A – 185

6 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

NOTE

The rear seat Type 4 retaining wire is in two

pieces with the break in the wire across the front

of the seat above the transmission tunnel.

7 Refit the rear seat cushion frame, refer to

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

Figure 1A7A – 186

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–284

Page 1A7A–284

Rear Seat Type 5

Surebond cushion cover and pad assembly are glued together as an assembly and are not serviced as separate

components. If either the pad or the cover requir es replacement, both will have to be replaced as a combined unit.

Rear Seat Type 8

Remove

1 If required, remove the rear seat cushion frame, refer to Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

2 If required, the retaining wire (1) from the casing (2)

attached to the rear seat cushion cover assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 187

3 Fold the rear corner of the rear seat cushion cover (1)

over the rear seat cushion pad (2).

Figure 1A7A – 188

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–285

Page 1A7A–285

4 While holding the rear seat cushion pad (1), pull the

rear corner of the seat cushion cover (2) away from

the rear seat cushion pad to disenga ge the hook and

loop strip (3).

Figure 1A7A – 189

5 After disengaging the outer hook and l oop strip (1),

disengage the cross hook and loop strip (2) while

holding the seat cushion pad (3).

Figure 1A7A – 190

6 While holding the rear seat cushion pad (1),

disengage the inner hook and loop strip (2).

7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the opposite half of the rear

seat cushion assembly.

8 Remove the rear seat cushion cover.

Figure 1A7A – 191

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–286

Page 1A7A–286

Reinstall

1 Align the inner hook and l oop strip (1) and the cross

hook and loop strip (2), on the seat cushion cover (3)

with the seat cushion pad (4).

2 Press the folded edge of the rear seat cushion cover

firmly into the corresponding groove in the seat

cushion pad to engage the hook and loop strip.

Figure 1A7A – 192

3 Align and press the outer hook and loop strip (1), on

the seat cushion cover (2), with the corresponding

groove in the seat cushion pad (3).

4 Repeat this process for the opposite half of the rear

seat cover and pad, starting with the inner strip.

Figure 1A7A – 193

5 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cushion cover assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 194

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–287

Page 1A7A–287

6 With the retaining wire (1) fitted to the rear seat

cushion cover (2), roll the front corner of the cover

over the seat cushion pad (3).

7 Roll the sides of the seat cushion cover over the seat

cushion pad.

8 Roll the rear corners (4) of the seat cushion cover over

the seat cushion pad.

NOTE

Ensure the pad is fitted neatly by hand into all

corners and contours of the seat cover.

9 Refit the rear seat cushion frame, refer to

Rear Seat Cushion Frame.

Figure 1A7A – 195

Reinstall

1 Sit the rear seat cushion assembly into positi on.

2 Push the rear seat cushion assembly (1) into the

seat-back and push the front of the cushion assembly

down until the locking mechanisms (2) lock into

position.

Figure 1A7A – 196

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–288

Page 1A7A–288

6.3 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Assembly

Right-hand and Left-hand Side

LT Section No. – 14-350

Remove

1 Raise the rear seat-back head restraint assembl y (1)

to the first stop position.

2 Depress the head restraint sleeve height adjuster

lock (2) and raise the head restraint to the upper stop

position.

Figure 1A7A – 197

3 Manufacture a suitable size probe and insert into the

hole (1) in the inboard head restraint sleeve (2).

4 Push the probe in slightly whil e applying slight upward

pressure on the headrest and remove the head

restraint completely out of the sleeve.

Figure 1A7A – 198

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–289

Page 1A7A–289

Except Rear Seat Type 8 Head Restraint

Disassemble

1 Unhook the wire retainer (1) from the head restraint

cover (2).

Figure 1A7A – 199

2 Carefully pull the wire retainer through the head

restraint cover and remove.

3 Repeat the process for the remaining wire retainer.

Figure 1A7A – 200

4 Starting at one end, gently pull the hea d restraint

cover back over the head restraint pad and remove.

Figure 1A7A – 201

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–290

Page 1A7A–290

Reassemble

Reassembly of the rear seat-back head restraint assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Align the cover to the head restraint pad taking note of the contour of both the cover and the pad.

2 Position the head restraint pad inner liner so that it covers the pad.

3 Both loops on the wire retaine r are hooked into the rear seat-back head restraint cover.

4 Ensure the cover is fitted neatly to the head restraint pad and has no creases.

Rear Seat Type 8 Head Restraint

Disassemble

1 Disengage the front head restraint cover J-stri p by

pulling the flap (1) back and out of flap (2) in the

direction shown.

2 Beginning at one corner of the head restraint, gently

remove the cover from the pad assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 202

Reassemble

Reassembly of the rear seat-back head restraint assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure the head

restraint cover J-strip is fully engaged and th e cover is fitted neatly with no creases.

Reinstall

Position the head restraint in the sleeves and push down firmly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–291

Page 1A7A–291

6.4 Rear Seat-back Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-325

Remove

1 If required, remove the following:

a Remove the rear seat cushion assembly, refer to 6.2 Rear Seat Cushion Assembly.

b Remove the lower seatbelt anchor bolt, refer to Section 12M, 2.2 Rear Seatbelt Assembly – Outboard.

2 Remove the bolt (1), retaining the rear seat-back

assembly (2) to the vehicle.

3 Lift the rear seat-back assembly up and out of the t wo

retaining brackets (3).

Figure 1A7A – 203

4 Insert a suitable screwdriver (1) into the seatbelt

escutcheon (2) and while applying a slight upwar d

pressure, push the retaining clip in to rel ease the

escutcheon.

5 Remove the seat belt and escutcheon from the rear

seat-back assembly by feedin g it through the opening

in the rear seat-back assembly.

6 Remove the rear seat-back assembly and repeat for

the opposite side if required.

Figure 1A7A – 204

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–292

Page 1A7A–292

Head Restraint Sleeve

Remove

If required, remove the rear seat-back head r estraint,

refer to 6.3 Rear Seat-back Head Restraint Assembly Right-hand and Left-hand Side.

1 From the back of rear seat-back (1) (foam side),

squeeze the head restraint sleeve locating prongs (2)

together and remove the sleeve up and out of the

seat-back assembly.

2 Repeat this process for the remaining head restraint

sleeve.

Figure 1A7A – 205

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat head restraint sleeve is the

reverse of the removal procedure ens uring the locating ribs

(2) of the head restraint sleeve (1) aligns with the key-way

(3) in the seat-back frame.

NOTE

The release button in the right-hand sleeve and

the hole in the left-hand side sleeve should face

each other when installed corr ectly.

Figure 1A7A – 206

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–293

Page 1A7A–293

Rear Seat-back Cover

Rear Seat Type 1 and 6

Remove

1 Place the rear seat-back assembly face down.

2 Using bolt cutters or side cutters, remove

approximately 31 hog rings (1) attaching the cover to

the outer sections of the rear seat-back pad and frame

assembly in the locations shown.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog

rings, not to damage the rear seat-back cover.

All hog rings will be damaged in this operation

and will require replacement.

NOTE

The rear seat Type 1, right-hand side rear

seat-back assembly is fitted with a first aid kit

pouch. For rear seat Type 6, the hog rings used

to attach the first aid kit pouch are installed along

the inner edge of the rear seat-back cushio n and

frame assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 207

3 Using the following sequence of operations continue

and cut the hog rings as they are revealed us ing bolt

cutters or side cutters at the locations shown.

Figure 1A7A – 208

4 Remove the head restraint sleeve, refer to Head Restraint Sleeve.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–294

Page 1A7A–294

5 Fold the upper portion of the rear seat-back cover (1)

over the rear seat-back pad assembly (2).

6 Remove the head restraint retaining wire (3) by cutting

the three hog rings (4).

Figure 1A7A – 209

7 While holding the rear seat-back pad assembly (1),

pull the outer edge of the cover (2) away from the rear

seat-back pad and cut the four hog rings (3) along the

outer groove.

Figure 1A7A – 210

8 While holding the seat-back pad assembly (1), fold the

top edge of the cover (2) over the top of the seat-back

assembly to reveal the four hog rings (3) in the upper

horizontal groove of the pad and cut to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 211

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–295

Page 1A7A–295

9 Remove the retaining wire (1) for the upper horizontal

groove from the casing (2) attached to the cover (3).

10 Continue to fold the cover towards the centre of the

pad and cut the three hog rings from the centre

corresponding groove.

11 If required, remove the retaining wire from the casing

attached to the cover as in step 6.

12 Repeat the process for the remaining thre e hog rings

and retaining wire in the inner corresp onding groove.

13 Remove the rear seat-back cover.

Figure 1A7A – 212

Reinstall

Using the following sequence of operations, align the rear seat-back cov er to the pad assembly (1) and attach with

approximately 17 hog rings in the positions shown, refer to Figure 1A7A – 208.

NOTE

Ensure that the seat-back cover aligns with all

grooves in the pad before attaching with hog

rings.

1 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the inn er

groove casing (2) attached to the cover (3).

Figure 1A7A – 213

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–296

Page 1A7A–296

2 Align the cover (1) to the inner vertical corresponding

groove in the pad (2) and attach with three hog rings

(3), using hog ring pliers.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the centre vertical

corresponding groove.

Figure 1A7A – 214

4 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the up per horizontal groove casing (2) attached to the cov er (3), refer

to Figure 1A7A – 213.

5 Align the cover (1) to the upper horizontal groove (2)

and attach with four hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 215

6 If removed, reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the outer groove casing (2) attached to the cover (3), refer to

Figure 1A7A – 213.

7 Align the cover (1) to the outer vertical groov e in the

pad and attach with four hog rings (2).

Figure 1A7A – 216

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–297

Page 1A7A–297

8 Attach the restraint retaining wire (1) with three hog

rings (2) to the frame.

Figure 1A7A – 217

9 Place the seat-back assembly face down on a clean

surface and using the following sequence of

operations, continue attaching the rear seat-back

cover (1) to the pad assembly (2) with hog rings (3),

approximately 31 places, in the positi ons shown.

Figure 1A7A – 218

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–298

Page 1A7A–298

10 Starting at the upper inner corner of the rear

seat-back, pull the cover (1) over the corner and

attach to the wire frame (2) with three hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 219

11 While pulling the outboard side corner of the cover (1)

over the top and towards the centre, fix with four hog

rings (2) to the wire frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 220

12 Continue at the outboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with seven hog ri ngs (3).

Figure 1A7A – 221

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–299

Page 1A7A–299

13 Continue at the inner lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with four hog rings (3).

14 Attach the seat-back cover lower pi ping overhang (4)

with one hog ring (5) back on to the lower piping.

Figure 1A7A – 222

15 If fitted with a first aid kit pouch (1) attach the pouch to

the frame (2) with five hog rings (3).

NOTE

The rear seat Type 1, right-hand side rear

seat-back assembly is fitted with a first aid kit

pouch. For rear seat Type 6 rear seat-back

assembly, the hog rings used to attach the first

aid kit pouch are installed along the inner edge

of the rear seat-back cushion and frame

assembly.

16 Continue along the inner edge and attach the cover to

the frame, by pulling the cover tight and fixi ng with a

further three hog rings.

NOTE

Ensure the cover is fitted neatly by hand into all

corners and contours of the rear seat-back pad

and is free from any creases. Figure 1A7A – 223

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–300

Page 1A7A–300

Rear Seat Type 2 and 7

Remove

1 Place the rear seat-back assembly face down.

2 Using bolt cutters or side cutters, remove

approximately 31 hog rings (1) attaching the outer

sections of the cover to the rear seat-back pad and

frame assembly.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog

rings, not to damage the rear seat-back cover.

All hog rings will be damaged in this operation

and will require replacement.

NOTE

The rear seat Type 2, right-hand side rear

seat-back assembly is fitted with a first aid kit

pouch. For rear seat Type 7 rear seat-back

assembly, the hog rings used to attach the first

aid kit pouch are installed along the inner edge

of the rear seat-back cushion and frame

assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 224

3 After removing the rear hog rings, continue with the

following sequence of operati ons and cut the hog rings

attaching the cover to the front side of the pad (1), as

they are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters at

the locations shown.

Figure 1A7A – 225

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–301

Page 1A7A–301

4 Fold the upper portion of the rear seat-back cover (1)

over the rear seat-back pad assembly (2) and remove

the three hog rings (3) attaching the head restraint

retaining wire (4).

Figure 1A7A – 226

5 While holding the rear seat-back pad assembly (1),

pull the outer edge of the cover (2) away from the rear

seat-back pad and cut the four hog rings (3) along the

outer groove.

Figure 1A7A – 227

6 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) for the outer

groove from the casing (2) attached to the cover (3).

Figure 1A7A – 228

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–302

Page 1A7A–302

7 While holding the seat-back pad assembly (1), fold the

top edge of the cover (2) over to reveal the four hog

rings (3) in the upper horizontal groove of the pad and

cut the hog rings to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 229

8 Remove the retaining wire (1) for the upper horizontal

groove from the casing (2) attached to the cover (3)

and remove the rear seat-back cover from the pad

assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 230

Reinstall

1 Using the following sequence of operations, align the

rear seat-back cover to the pad assembly (1) and

attach with approximately eight hog rings in the

positions shown.

NOTE

Ensure that the rear seat-back cover aligns with

the pad at all grooves before attachin g hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 231

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–303

Page 1A7A–303

2 Reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the upper horiz ontal

groove casing (2) attached to the cover (3).

Figure 1A7A – 232

3 Align the cover (1) to the upper horizontal groove (2)

and attach with four hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 233

4 Reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the outer groove

casing (2) attached to the cover (3).

Figure 1A7A – 234

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–304

Page 1A7A–304

5 Align the cover (1) to the outboard vertical groove in

the pad and attach with four hog rings (2).

Figure 1A7A – 235

6 Attach the head restraint retaining wire (1) with three

hog rings (2) to the frame.

Figure 1A7A – 236

7 Place the seat-back assembly face down on a clean surface and using the following sequence of operati ons,

continue attaching the rear seat-back cover (1) to the pad assembly (2) with hog rings (3), appro x imately 31 places,

in the positions shown, refer Figure 1A7A – 224.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–305

Page 1A7A–305

8 Starting at the upper inboard corner of the rear

seat-back, pull the cover (1) over the corner and

attach to the wire frame (2) with three hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 237

9 While pulling the outboard side corner of the cover (1)

over the top and towards the centre, fix with four hog

rings (2) to the wire frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 238

10 Continue at the outboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with seven hog ri ngs (3).

Figure 1A7A – 239

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–306

Page 1A7A–306

11 Continue at the inboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with four hog rings (3).

12 Attach the seat-back cover lower pi ping overhang (4)

with one hog ring (5) back on to the lower piping.

Figure 1A7A – 240

13 Continue along the inboard edge and attach the cover

to the frame, by pulling the cover tight and fixing with a

further three hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 241

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–307

Page 1A7A–307

Rear Seat Type 3 and 4

Remove

1 Place the seat-back assembly face down on a clean

surface.

2 Using the following sequence of operations, use bolt

cutters or side cutters to remove approximatel y 31 hog

rings (1) attaching the outer sections of the cover to

the rear seat-back pad and frame assembly in the

positions shown.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog

rings, not to damage the rear seat-back cover.

All hog rings will be damaged in this operation

and will require replacement.

Figure 1A7A – 242

3 Continue to remove the rear seat-back cove r from the

front of the pad assembly (1) by cutting the 11 hog

rings as they are revealed using bolt cutters or side

cutters.

Figure 1A7A – 243

4 Remove the head restraint sleeves, refer to Head Restraint Sleeve.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–308

Page 1A7A–308

5 Fold the upper portion of the rear seat-back cover (1)

over the rear seat-back pad assembly (2).

6 Cut the three hog rings (3) attaching the retaining wire

(4) to the frame assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 244

7 Fold the cover (1) over the top to reveal the four hog

rings (2) in the continuation of the outer groove

running across the top of the pad and cut the hog rings

to remove.

Figure 1A7A – 245

8 While holding the rear seat-back pad assembly (1),

pull the outboard edge of the cover away from the rear

seat-back pad and cut the four hog rings (2) along the

outer groove.

Figure 1A7A – 246

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–309

Page 1A7A–309

9 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 247

10 Continue to fold the rear seat-back cover (1) to wards

the centre revealing the outer hog ri ng (2) in the lower

horizontal groove.

11 Cut the outer hog ring and continu e until all three hog

rings have been removed.

Figure 1A7A – 248

12 If required, remove the retaining wire (1) from the

casing (2) attached to the cover.

13 Remove the rear seat-back cover.

Figure 1A7A – 249

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–310

Page 1A7A–310

Reinstall

1 Using the following sequence of operations, align the rear seat-back cover to the pad assembly (1) and attach with

11 hog rings in the locations shown, refer Figure 1A7A – 243

2 Reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the lower horizontal

groove casing (2) attached to the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 250

3 Align the cover (1) to the lower horizontal groove in the

pad (2) and attach with four hog rings (3), using hog

ring pliers.

Figure 1A7A – 251

4 Reinstall the retaining wire (1) into the outer groove

casing (2) attached to the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 252

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–311

Page 1A7A–311

5 Align the cover (1) to the outer the groove along the

outboard edge of the pad and attach with four hog

rings (2).

Figure 1A7A – 253

6 Continue to fit the cover (1) to the upper horizontal

groove and attach with four hog rings (2).

Figure 1A7A – 254

7 Fold the cover into the head restraint area a nd

attached the retaining wire (1) for the head re straint

with three hog rings (2) to the frame.

Figure 1A7A – 255

8 Place the seat-back assembly face down on a clean surface and using the following sequence of operati ons,

continue attaching the rear seat-back cover (1) to the pad assembly (2) with hog rings (3), approximately 31 places

in the positions shown, refer Figure 1A7A – 242.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–312

Page 1A7A–312

9 Starting at the upper inboard corner of the rear

seat-back, pull the cover (1) over the corner and

attach to the wire frame (2) with three hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 256

10 While pulling the outboard side corner of the cover (1)

over the top and towards the centre, fix with four hog

rings (2) to the wire frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 257

11 Continue at the outboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with seven hog ri ngs (3).

Figure 1A7A – 258

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–313

Page 1A7A–313

12 Continue at the inboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with four hog rings (3).

13 Attach the seat-back cover lower pi ping overhang (4)

with one hog ring (5) back on to the lower piping.

Figure 1A7A – 259

14 Attach the first aid kit pouch (1) to the frame (2) with

five hog rings (3).

NOTE

Make sure the rear seat-back cover is fitted

neatly by hand into all corners and contours of

the seat pad and is free from any creases.

15 Continue along the inboard edge and attach the cover

to the frame, by pulling the cover tight and fixing with a

further three hog rings.

Figure 1A7A – 260

Rear Seat Type 5

Surebond rear seat-back cover and pad are glued together as an assembly and are not serviced. If either the pad or the

cover requires replacement both will have to be replaced as a combined unit.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–314

Page 1A7A–314

Rear Seat Type 8

Remove

Safety glasses an d work glo ves must be w orn

at all times when removing the hog rings.

NOTE

The following procedures are applicable to both

left and right-hand rear seat-back assemblies.

1 Place the rear seat-back assembly face down.

2 Using bolt cutters or side cutters, remove

approximately 31 hog rings (1) attaching the outer

sections of the cover to the rear seat-back pad and

frame assembly.

NOTE

Care must be taken when removing the hog

rings, not to damage the rear seat-back cover.

All hog rings will be damaged in this operation

and will require replacement.

3 Remove the rear head restraint sleeve, refer to

Head Restraint Sleeve.

Figure 1A7A – 261

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–315

Page 1A7A–315

4 After removing the rear hog rings, continue with the

following sequence of operati ons and cut the hog rings

attaching the cover to the front side of the pad (1), as

they are revealed using bolt cutters or side cutters at

the locations shown.

Figure 1A7A – 262

5 Fold the upper portion of the rear seat-back cover (1)

over the rear seat-back pad assembly (2).

6 Cut the three hog rings (3) attaching the retaining wire

(4) to the frame assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 263

7 While holding the rear seat-back pad assembly (1),

pull the upper corner of the cover (2) away from the

rear seat-back pad to disengage the hook and loop

strip (3).

Figure 1A7A – 264

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–316

Page 1A7A–316

8 Remove the one or two cross hook and loop strips (1)

while holding the rear seat-back pad (2).

Figure 1A7A – 265

9 Fold the lower corner of the cover (1) over the

seat-back pad (2).

10 Remove the rear seat-back cover.

Figure 1A7A – 266

Reinstall

1 Align the outer hook and loop strip (1) on the

seat-back cover (2), with the rear seat-back pad (3).

Figure 1A7A – 267

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–317

Page 1A7A–317

2 Align the two cross hook and loop strips (1), on the

rear seat-back cover (2), with the rear seat -back pad

(3).

Figure 1A7A – 268

3 Press the folded edge of the rear seat-back cover (1)

firmly into the corresponding groove i n the se at-back

pad (2) to engage the hook and loop strip.

Figure 1A7A – 269

4 Attach the head restraint retaining wire (1) with hog

ring (2), three places to the frame (3) using hog ring

pliers.

Figure 1A7A – 270

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–318

Page 1A7A–318

5 Roll the lower corner of the cover (1) over the rear

seat-back pad (2).

6 Roll the sides of the cover over the seat-back pad.

7 Roll the upper corners of the cover over the seat-back

pad.

NOTE

Make sure the cover is fitted neatly by hand into

all corners and contours of the seat back-pad.

Figure 1A7A – 271

8 Using the following sequenc e of operations, attach the

rear seat-back cover (1) to the rear seat-back pad and

frame assembly (2), with approximately 31 hog rin gs

(3), in the positions shown.

Figure 1A7A – 272

9 Starting at the upper outboard corner of the rear

seat-back, pull the cover (1) over the corner and

attach to the wire frame (2) with three hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 273

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–319

Page 1A7A–319

10 While pulling the outboard side corner of the cover (1)

over the top and towards the centre, fix with four hog

rings (2) to the wire frame (3).

Figure 1A7A – 274

11 Continue at the outboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with seven hog ri ngs (3).

Figure 1A7A – 275

12 Continue at the inboard lower corner and attach the

cover (1) to the frame (2), by pulling the cover tight

and fixing with four hog rings (3).

13 Attach the seat-back cover lower pi ping overhang (4)

with one hog ring (5) back on to the lower piping.

Figure 1A7A – 276

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–320

Page 1A7A–320

14 Continue attaching the cover (1) to the frame (2), by

pulling the cover tight and fixing with five hog rings (3).

Figure 1A7A – 277

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Feed the seatbelt (1) in through rear seat-back

assembly (2).

2 Position the seatbelt escutcheon (3) at an angle and

feed it through the rear seat-back assembly.

NOTE

Ensure the seatbelt is not twisted and its

operation is free from any interference

Figure 1A7A – 278

3 Tighten all attaching bolts to the spec ified torque.

Rear seat-back assembly attaching

bolt torque specification..........................25.0 – 35.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–321

Page 1A7A–321

6.5 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint

Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-350

Remove

1 Raise the rear seat-back centre head restraint (1) to

the first stop position.

2 Depress the head restraint sleeve height adjuster

lock (2) and raise the head restraint to the upper stop

position.

Figure 1A7A – 279

3 Manufacture a suitable size probe and insert into the

hole (1) in the left-hand head restraint sleeve (2).

4 Push the probe in slightly whil e applying slight upward

pressure on the head restrain t and remove the head

restraint completely out of the sleeve.

Figure 1A7A – 280

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–322

Page 1A7A–322

Disassemble

1 While holding the rear seat-back centre head restraint

(1) upside down, un-zip the cover taking note that the

tag for the zip (2) is located on the inside of the cover.

Figure 1A7A – 281

2 Beginning at one end, compr ess the foam (1) towards

the head restraint post (2) and begin to pull the cover

(3) over the pad.

3 Repeat this process for the other side.

Figure 1A7A – 282

4 Remove the cover (1) from the pad and slide off the

post.

Figure 1A7A – 283

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–323

Page 1A7A–323

Reassemble

Reassembly of the rear seat-back centre head restraint cover is the reverse of the removal process noting the follo wing:

1 Position the head restraint cover over the post.

2 Starting at one end of the head restraint, insert the pad into the cover and working from one end to another, push

the pad into the cover until it is completely inserted.

3 Work the cover over the head restraint so that the cover is smooth and free from creases.

4 Close the zip ensuring the tag is located on the inside of the cover.

Reinstall

Position the head restraint in the head restraint sleeves a nd push the rear seat-back centre head restrain t down firmly.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–324

Page 1A7A–324

6.6 Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest

Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-325

Remove

1 Lower the armrest assembly (1) and disengage the trim flap J-strips (2) from the armrest hinge to gain access to

the retaining screws, refer to Figure 1A7A – 284.

2 Remove the retaining screw (3), four places, from the rear seat-back centre tra y (4), two from above the armrest

and two from below.

3 Remove the armrest assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 284

Disassemble Rear Seat Type 1 – 4

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Hinge

Remove

Remove the three screws (1) attaching the hinge (2) to the

rear seat-back centre armrest assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 285

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–325

Page 1A7A–325

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back centre armrest hinge is reverse of the removal procedure, notin g the following:

Ensure all attaching screws are tightened to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre armrest hinge

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid and Cover

If required, remove the armrest assembly, refer to 6.6 Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Assembly.

Remove

1 Open the rear seat-back centre armrest lid (1), remove

the three screws (2) and remove the lid.

Figure 1A7A – 286

2 Remove the two screws (1), attaching the armrest lid

latch (2).

3 Using a suitable size scre wdriver, gently prise up the

retaining strip (3), three places.

4 Remove the cover from the rear seat-back centre

armrest lid.

Figure 1A7A – 287

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–326

Page 1A7A–326

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back centre armrest lid cover is the reverse of the removal proce dure, noting the following:

1 Fit the cover by hand ensuring the cover is free from creases.

2 Ensure the retainer strips are located full y into the grooves.

3 Tighten all attaching screws to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre armrest lid

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear seat-back centre armrest lid latch

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Deposit Box, Cover and Cup Holder

To remove the rear seat-back centre armrest deposit box, cup holder or cover, the cover and cup holder need to be

removed from the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly as a combined unit. To assist the technician to disassemble

the seat-back centre armrest assembly without cross referencing to different sections, the deposit box, cover and cup

holder remove and reinstall procedures are all covered in the same procedure.

Remove

1 If required, remove the rear seat-back centre armrest lid, refer to Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid and Cover.

2 Remove the screw (1), three places, attaching the rear

seat-back centre armrest lid hinge (2) to the deposit

box assembly (3).

3 Gently prise up the retaining s trip (4), three places.

Figure 1A7A – 288

4 While holding the deposit box assembly (1) g ently pull

the foam pad (2) and cover (3) away from the deposit

box.

Figure 1A7A – 289

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–327

Page 1A7A–327

5 With the cover (1) folded back from the deposit box

assembly, depress the cup holder retaining tabs (2)

and remove the cup holder with the cover out of the

cup holder housing (3).

Figure 1A7A – 290

6 Remove the cover (1) from the cup holder (2) b y

gently pulling the cover back over the cup h older.

Figure 1A7A – 291

7 Remove the four screws (1) attaching the cup holder

housing (2) to the deposit box (3).

Figure 1A7A – 292

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–328

Page 1A7A–328

Reinstall

1 Reinstall the cup holder housing to the deposit box and tighten all attaching screws to the specified torque, refer to

Figure 1A7A – 292.

Cup holder housing attaching

screw torque specification...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

2 Slide the cover (1) over the cup holder (2) ensuring the

cover fits neatly to the edge of the cup holder.

Figure 1A7A – 293

3 With the cover (1) folded back, slide the cup hol der (2)

into the cup holder housing (3) attached to the deposit

box, ensuring the cover fits neatl y into the cup holder

housing and the retaining clips lock in the cup holder

housing.

Figure 1A7A – 294

4 Reinstallation of the cover, pad and hinge is the reverse of the removal procedure noting the following:

a Ensure the cover is fitted neatly by hand and free from creases.

b All retainer strips are secured correctly.

c Tighten the rear seat-back centre armrest lid hinge attaching screws to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre armrest lid hi nge

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–329

Page 1A7A–329

Reassemble

Reassembly of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Ensure the armrest assembly hinge is installed before the cover is fitted and the attaching screws are tightened to the

specified torque.

Armrest hinge attaching screw

torque specification...................................7.0 – 10.0 Nm

Disassemble Rear Seat Type 5 – 8

1 Remove the nine staples (1) securing the u pper flap

armrest cover (2) to the armrest pad assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 295

2 Remove the three staples (1) securing the lo wer flap

of the armrest cover (2) to the armrest pad assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 296

3 Pull the cover (1) along the armrest to allow access to

the hinge retaining screws.

4 Remove the four screws (2) securing the armrest

hinge (3) to the armrest assembly (4) and remove the

hinges.

5 Remove the armrest cover from the armrest pad

assembly.

Figure 1A7A – 297

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–330

Page 1A7A–330

Reassemble

Assembly of the rear seat-back centre armrest assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Ensure the armrest assembly hinge is installed before the cover is fitted.

2 Ensure all attaching screws are tightened to the specified torque.

Armrest hinge attaching screw

torque specification...................................7.0 – 10.0 Nm

3 The cover is to be smooth and without creases, before the staples are installed.

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat -back centre armrest assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the

following:

1 Ensure a ll attaching screws are tightened to the specifi ed torque.

Armrest hinge assembly attaching

screw torque specification...........................3.5 – 5.0 Nm

2 Refit the armrest trim flap (1) upper J-strip (2) to the

upper part of the hinge bracket (3).

Figure 1A7A – 298

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–331

Page 1A7A–331

6.7 Rear Seat-back Centre Assembly

LT Section No. – 14-325

Remove

Although there are phys ical differences bet ween the different types of centre rear seat-back assemblies, the removal and

reinstallation procedures are the same for all.

1 If required, remove the rear seat-back assembl y, refer to 6.4 Rear Seat-back Assembly.

2 Remove the four bolts (1) attaching the rear seat-back

centre assembly to the rear compartment front panel.

3 Unlatch the rear seat-back assembly and remove from

the vehicle.

Figure 1A7A – 299

Disassemble

Pad Assembly, Cover and Head Restraint Sleeves

If required, remove the following:

1 Head restraint, refer to 6.5 Rear Seat-back Centre Head Restraint Assembl y.

2 Rear seat-back centre armrest, refer to 6.6 Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Assembly.

Remove

1 If fitted with an armrest, pull the four retaining strips (1)

in the centre of the seat-back centre assembly (2), up

and away from the inside of the seat-back tray (3).

Figure 1A7A – 300

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–332

Page 1A7A–332

2 On the outer edge of the seat-back centre tray (1),

lever up the retaining strip (2), four places.

Figure 1A7A – 301

3 Remove the four staples (1) each side, attaching the

cover (2) to the seat-back tray (3).

4 Peel the cover away from the seat-back tray.

Figure 1A7A – 302

5 Lever the seat cover material (1) over the release

button (2) and escutcheon assembly (3).

Figure 1A7A – 303

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–333

Page 1A7A–333

6 From the back of rear seat-back (1) (foam side), fold

the foam back and squeeze the head restraint sleeve

locating prongs (2) together and remove the sleeve up

and out of the centre seat-back assembly.

7 Remove the cover and pad.

Figure 1A7A – 304

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat centre back cover and pad assembly is the reverse of the removal proce dure, noting the

following:

1 The cover is to be smooth and without creases before the staples are installed.

2 Ensure all retaining strips are attached properly.

3 When installing the head restraint sleeve, align the locating ribs with the key-way in the seat-back frame.

NOTE

Ensure the sleeve with the height adj uster lock is

installed on the side that corresponds to the

notches in the head restraint shaft.

Rear Seat-back Centre Release Button

Remove

If required, remove the rear seat-back cover, refer to Pad Assembly, Cover and Hea d Restraint Sleeves.

1 Using a screwdriver, depress the two tangs (1) on the

front and rear of the release button (2).

2 Pull the release button from the rear seat-back

centre (3).

Figure 1A7A – 305

Reinstall

Push the release button into the rear seat-back centre assembly, until the button clicks home.

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–334

Page 1A7A–334

Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Actuator

Remove

If required, remove the rear seat-back cover, refer to Pad Assembly, Cover and Hea d Restraint Sleeves.

1 Remove the two screws (1) securing the lock

actuator (2) to the back tray (3) and remove lock

actuator.

2 Disengage the release button rod (4) from the lock

actuator.

Figure 1A7A – 306

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back centre lock actuator is the reverse of the removal proc edure noting the following:

1 Ensure the button assembly and lock actuator rod are correctly engaged.

2 Ensure all attaching screws are tightened to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre lock

actuator attaching screw

torque specification.....................................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Hinge

Remove

If required, remove the rear seat-back cover, refer to Pad Assembly, Cover and Hea d Restraint Sleeves.

1 Remove the two screws (2) securing the hinge (1) to

the rear seat-back centre tray assembly (3) and

remove the hinge.

2 If required, repeat for the opposite hinge.

Figure 1A7A – 307

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back centre hinge is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Ensure all attaching screws are tightened to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre hinge

attaching screw torque specification...........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat-back assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Ensure the rear seat-back assembly is positione d centrally and there is no bind ing of the latch assembly.

2 Tighten all attaching bolts to the spec ified torque.

Rear seat-back centre assembly

attaching bolt torque specification...........25.0 – 35.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–335

Page 1A7A–335

6.8 Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker

LT Section No. – 14-350

Remove

1 If required, remove the following:

a Remove the rear seat cushion assembly, refer to 6.2 Rear Seat Cushion Assembly.

b Remove the rear seat-back assembly, refer to 6.4 Rear Seat-back Assembl y.

2 Prise the two retaining clips ( 1) securing the rear

seat-back cover (2) to the rear compartment front

panel and remove the cover.

3 If required, remove the two bump stops (3) from the

rear compartment front panel.

4 Remove the two screws (4) securing the striker (5) to

the rear panel and remove the striker.

Figure 1A7A – 308

Reinstall

Reinstallation of the rear seat lock striker is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

Ensure all attaching screws are tightened to the specified torque.

Rear seat-back centre lock striker

attaching screw torque specification.......25.0 – 35.0 Nm

Seat Assemblies Page 1A7A–336

Page 1A7A–336

7 Torque Wrench Specifications

Front Seat

Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket Attaching Screw................15.0 – 20.0 Nm

Front Seat Assembly Attaching Screw......................................35.0 – 50.0 Nm

Front Seat Outer Front Cover Attaching Screw.............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Front Seat Adjustment Switch Attaching Screw ............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Memory Position Switch Cover Attaching Screw...........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Front Seat Outer Side Cover Attaching Screw..............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Front Seat Inner Side Cover Attaching Screw...............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Front Seat-back Map Pocket Attaching Screw..............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Pivot Hinge Attaching Screw.....1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Attaching Screw........................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat Entertainment Circuit Board Attaching Screw...............1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat Entertainment Head Rest Escutcheo n Attaching

Screw ............................................................................................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Lumbar Support Knob Attaching Screw.........................................2.0 – 5.0 Nm

Side Impact Airbag Assembly Attaching Nut.................................5.0 – 6.0 Nm

Front Seat Dummy Block Insert Assembly Attaching Nut..............5.0 – 6.0 Nm

Active Head Restraint Frame Assembly Attaching Nut .................3.0 – 5.0 Nm

Front Seat-back Frame Assembly Attaching Screw..................30.0 – 45.0 Nm

Track and Height Adjust Assembly Attaching Nut.....................24.0 – 32.0 Nm

Rear Seat

Rear Seat-back Assembly Attaching Bolt..................................25.0 – 35.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Hinge Attaching Screw...............1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid Attaching Screw....................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid Latch Attaching Screw..........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Cup Holder Housing Attaching Screw ...........................................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Armrest Lid Hinge Attaching Screw .........1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Armrest Hinge Attaching Screw...................................................7.0 – 10.0 Nm

Armrest Hinge Assembly Attaching Screw....................................3.5 – 5.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Actuator Attaching Screw................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Hinge Attaching Screw.............................1.0 – 3.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Assembly Attaching Bolt......................25.0 – 35.0 Nm

Rear Seat-back Centre Lock Striker Attaching Screw...............25.0 – 35.0 Nm